Support Structures for a Flexible Electronic Component

ABSTRACT

A dynamically flexible article or device, such as a wristband, an armband, a rollable e-reader, or a belt, includes a flexible electronic component (e.g., a flexible display) and a support structure coupled to the flexible electronic component. The support structure is configured to limit bending of the flexible electronic component to a range within a bending tolerance of the flexible electronic component.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a divisional of U.S. patent application Ser. No.14/847,693, entitled “Support Structures for a Flexible ElectronicComponent” which was filed on Sep. 8, 2015 (Ref. No.: 32187/49173A) as acontinuation application of International Patent No. PCT/US14/72313filed Dec. 24, 2014, which claims priority to and the benefit of thefiling dates of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/920,705,entitled “Dynamically Flexible, Attachable Device Having an IntegralFlexible Display” which was filed on Dec. 24, 2013 (Ref. No.:32187/48118P); U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/969,531,entitled “Dynamically Flexible, Attachable Device Having a FlexibleElectronic Display” which was filed on Mar. 24, 2014 (Ref. No.:32187/47794P2); U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/979,668,entitled “Support Structure for a Flexible Electronic Component,” whichwas filed on Apr. 15, 2014 (Ref. No.: 32187/48292P); and U.S. PatentProvisional Application Ser. No. 62/003,549, entitled “FlexibleElectronic Component Movably Coupled to a Flexible Support” which wasfiled on May 28, 2014 (Ref. No.: 32187/48467P), the entire disclosuresof each of these applications being hereby expressly incorporated byreference herein for all uses and purposes.

TECHNICAL FIELD

This patent application relates generally to dynamically flexiblearticles, and more particularly to a support structure for dynamicallyflexible electronic components, such as flexible OLED lighting,collapsible e-readers, roll-out screens, or displays incorporated intoor disposed on articles that are easily attachable to other items, suchas arms, mugs, shoes, belts, coffee cups, phones, computers, etc.

BACKGROUND

Electronic components such as electronic displays are commonly installedwithin flat, hard surfaces of electronic devices, such as computerscreens, television sets, smart phones, tablet computers, etc., and inmany cases are installed on accessories for the electronic devices, suchas removable monitors. Many electronic devices having an electronicdisplay are portable, and have thus become very useful in implementingmobile applications. This fact is particularly true with smart phoneswhich have become ubiquitous. However, unfortunately, typical mobiledevices such as smart phones have electronic displays that are flat andrigid in nature. Thus, while these displays are useful in implementingmany different applications, the device on which the display is presentmust still typically be held in a hand, or must be stored in a pocket, apurse, a briefcase or other container, which makes the electronic deviceless accessible in many situations, such as when a person is carryingother items, undertaking an athletic activity such as running, walking,etc. Moreover, in many cases these traditional electronic devicesrequire two free hands to hold and operate, making these devicescumbersome or difficult to use or to view in situations in which, forexample, a person has only one or no free hands or is otherwiseoccupied.

While flexible displays are generally known and are starting to comeinto more common usage, flexible displays have not been widelyincorporated into easily portable items such as items of clothing,wristbands, jewelry, etc., or on items that are easily attached to otheritems, much less in a manner that makes the display more useable andvisible to the user in many different scenarios.

A flexible electronic component, such as a flexible electronic circuit,a sensor tag, a flexible OLED light, or a flexible display, is amulti-layered stack typically formed of both brittle and organic layers.In some cases, the flexible electronic component may include built-instrains that exist in one or more layers of the component due to theprocessing conditions of the component(e.g., temperature inducedstrain). In any case, as a flexible electronic component is typicallyproduced on a flat surface, a curvature or bending of the flexibleelectronic component creates a certain strain profile in the layers ofthe component. The strain profile created by the curvature of bending ofthe component, as well as any built-in strains that may exist within thecomponent, may, in turn, cause one or more of the layers of the flexibleelectronic component to buckle, crack, or otherwise become damaged. Theorganic layers in a flexible electronic component can typicallywithstand strains up to 8% before breaking or deforming in a non-elasticway. The brittle, inorganic layers in a flexible electronic componentcan, however, only typically withstand strains of approximately 1%before buckling or cracking, depending of course on the processingconditions of the component. As such, the brittle layers of the flexibleelectronic component generally buckle or crack first in response toexcess strain.

When a flexible electronic component is bent or curved, the outer radiusof the component will be under tension, while the inner radius will beunder compression. At some point in the layer stack of the component,the neutral plane, where there is no tension or compression uponbending, can be found. The layer stacking, the layer thickness, and thelayer properties, such as the Young's modulus, determine the position ofthe neutral plane; for a symmetrical stack of layers the neutral planeis generally located near a middle of the stack. Based on the exactlocation of the neutral plane and the maximum tolerable strain value(e.g., 1%), the minimum bending radius can be determined for each of thelayers in the component. Because, as noted above, the brittle, inorganiclayers in the component can typically withstand less strain than theorganic layers, the brittle layers typically have a greater minimumbending radius than the organic layers. In turn, the greater minimumbending radius of these brittle layers governs or controls the amount ofbending or curvature that the flexible electronic component can undergobefore the component is damaged (i.e., the bending range of thecomponent).

To provide support to the flexible electronic component and prevent auser of the flexible electronic component from bending or flexing thecomponent beyond such a minimum bending radius, and, thus, preventdamage to the component, the component can be fixedly attached to amechanical support structure. International Patent ApplicationPublication No. WO 2006/085271, for example, describes attaching a metalleaf spring to a flexible display. As another example, U.S. PatentApplication Publication No. 2013/0044215 describes a wearable articlethat includes a flexible display and a bi-stable snap metal stripattached to the flexible display.

The problem with attaching a flexible electronic display to a mechanicalsupport structure, such as, for example, a metal leaf spring, is thatthe attachment of the mechanical support structure to the displaytypically causes the neutral plane to shift from its initial position(in the display) to a position within the mechanical support structure.Because of the relationship between the location of the neutral planeand the minimum bending radius, shifting the neutral plane in this waysignificantly increases the minimum bending radius of the layers in thedisplay, particularly the brittle layers in the display. In doing so,the mechanical support structure can serve to significantly reduce, ifnot effectively destroy, the bending or flexing ability of the flexibleelectronic display. This is generally true for other flexible electroniccomponents as well.

Moreover, these mechanical support structures, and other knownmechanical support structures, do not sufficiently protect the flexibleelectronic component to which they are attached. Specifically, knownmechanical support structures do not sufficiently limit bending of theflexible electronic component, or portions thereof, such that a user ofthe flexible electronic component can bend or flex the display beyondits minimum bending radius, bend or flex the flexible electroniccomponent in more than one direction, and/or cause defects in theflexible electronic component, thereby damaging the component. The metalleaf spring described above, for example, may help fix the flexibledisplay in the readable position, but does not actually prevent theflexible display, whether in this position or another position, frombeing bent or flexed beyond its minimum bending radius or from beingbent or flexed in multiple directions. Meanwhile, the bi-stable snapmetal strip noted above is not concerned with limiting bending of theattached wearable display product. When, for example, the bi-stable snapmetal strip is in a flat state, the bi-stable snap metal strip provideslittle to no resistance against upward (counter-clockwise) bending, suchthat the wearable product, and, more particularly, the flexible display,can be freely bent in this direction. When the bi-stable snap metalstrip is in a curled state, the bi-stable snap metal strip provideslittle to no resistance against further bending, such that the wearableproduct, and, more particularly, the flexible display, can be freelybent in this direction. When bending in either or both of thesedirections exceeds the governing minimum bending radius of the flexibledisplay, the layers of the flexible electronic component can break,crack, or otherwise become damaged.

SUMMARY

A dynamically flexible article or device, such as a wristband, a belt,an armband, a rollable e-reader, mobile device with a foldable display,etc., includes a flexible electronic component (e.g., a flexibledisplay, a flexible OLED light, a flexible electronic circuit, a sensortag, etc.) and a support structure (e.g., a flexible substrate, a hingedsegmented structure, etc.) coupled to the flexible electronic component.The support structure is configured to limit bending of the flexibleelectronic component to a range within a bending tolerance of theflexible electronic component.

In some cases, the support structure is a flexible support structurethat is movably coupled to the flexible electronic component in a mannerthat allows the flexible support structure and the flexible electroniccomponent to move relative to or independently of one another when theattachable article is moved between different positions (e.g., when thelocal bending state of the article is changed). Because the flexibleelectronic component and the flexible support structure are movableindependently of one another, the amount of strain that the flexiblesupport structure places on the flexible electronic component when thearticle is being bent or curved is minimized. In particular, by movablycoupling the flexible support structure to or with the flexibleelectronic component, the flexible support structure does not alter oronly minimally alters the neutral plane of the flexible electroniccomponent. This feature, in turn, minimizes the critical bending radiusof the flexible electronic component when coupled to the flexiblesupport structure. As such, the flexible support structure providessupport to the flexible electronic component while substantiallymaintaining the bending ability (e.g., the bending range) of theflexible electronic component (i.e., the bending ability of the articleis substantially similar to the bending ability of the flexibleelectronic display itself).

In some cases, the support structure includes a first substrate and asecond substrate movably connected to the first substrate such that thesupport structure is configured to limit bending of the article andprovide torsion protection for the flexible electronic component. Thesupport structure generally restricts the amount of torsion that can beapplied to the flexible electronic component based on a torsiontolerance of the flexible electronic component. The support structuremay, for example, restrict torsion to a range within +/−20 degrees, to arange within +/−10 degrees, or to some other suitable range.

In some cases, the dynamically flexible, attachable article includes aclasping structure that connects the two ends of the substrate togetherin a manner that maximizes the amount of continuous display surfaceviewable to the user when the band is disposed on the user's wrist orarm. In particular, the band includes a clasping structure located atthe position of the band that lies or falls on the outside of the user'swrist or arm when the band is properly attached to the wrist or arm. Inthis case, the discontinuity in the display surface falls at a pointnext to or adjacent to the outside wrist of the wearer, which is thehardest point of the display for the user to view in a natural manner,and which thus minimizes the likelihood that the user will ever need toview a portion of the display at which the discontinuity falls.Moreover, this feature enables the user to view a continuous displayalong the band as the user, looking at the top of the band, turns his orher palm from a face down to a face up position, thus enabling a user toview a long continuous display screen or to view multiple differentdisplay screens without observing the portion of the display at whichthe discontinuity caused by the clasping mechanism occurs. This featureprovides for a more usable and ergonomic band, as this feature providesthe maximal amount of continuous viewable display surface to the userwhen wearing the band.

The band, by the nature of the flexible substrate and flexibleelectronic display, is dynamically bendable or conformable to a user'swrist, arm or other curved surface, and enables various images to bedisplayed on the electronic display in a manner that is easily viewableto a user or wearer of the band. The dynamically flexible, attachablearticle with such a flexible electronic display may be attached to orworn on a user's body, such as in the form of a wristband for example,and may bend to fit the various contours or body surfaces on which theelectronic display is located. The dynamically flexible, attachablearticle is also easily attached to other items, such as mugs, cups,computers, phone covers, bike handles, automobile dashboards, stands,etc., that enable the flexible display to be viewed when not being heldin one's hands or on one's body. Still further, the dynamically flexibleattachable article may be laid out flat and may be displayed on orattached to a surface in a manner that enables the electronic display tobe viewable to a user. In one case, the dynamically flexible, attachablearticle may be placed on a flat stand having a charging contact in amanner that enables the band device to be charged while also orientingthe display of the band device to be visible to those looking at thestand.

In any event, the electronic display of the attachable article isviewable to a user and is capable of being manipulated or actuated bythe user without having to be held in one or both of the user's hands,making the electronic device useable while the user is engaged in orperforming other activities, such as running, biking, etc.

In one case, the dynamically flexible, attachable electronic deviceincludes a flexible electronic display disposed on a flexible, e.g.,bendable, support in the form of a generally rectangular shape, withone, two, or more fasteners or clasping members attached to the supportthat allow the attachable device to be removably attached to itself, toanother object, or worn by a person. The fasteners may be end-pieces, orthe fasteners may be located along the length of the support. Controland communication electronics of the device are disposed in one or moreelectronic modules that may be within, for example, one or more of thefasteners. In some cases, the one or more electronic modules areself-contained and are attached to the flexible support at a locationother than the locations of the fasteners or clasping members. For easeof reading, the one or more electronics modules are referred to hereinin the singular (i.e., “electronics module”), although it is understoodthat a dynamically flexible, attachable electronic device may includemore than one electronics module.

The electronics module includes a processor for implementingapplications or programming, such as an application or program tocommunicate with a display driver to drive the electronic display todisplay fixed or changeable messages, artwork, pictures, etc. Theelectronic module also includes a memory for storing pictures, images,messages, videos, etc., to be displayed on the electronic display atvarious times, as well as for storing applications and application data,such as configuration data, to be used by applications for performingvarious display tasks at different times. The electronic module, whichmay be rigid in nature, may also include a battery for powering theelectronic display, the processor, the display driver, and otherelectronic elements, a battery charging device for charging the batteryeither in a wireless or a wired manner, and a communications module thatenables other computer devices to communicate with the processor, thedisplay driver and the memory to provide new or different images ormessages to be displayed on the electronic display, to configure theoperation of the electronic display of the attachable electronic device,etc.

The flexible electronic display may be fabricated using any desiredflexible electronic display material, such as any of various suitableplastics. If desired, the flexible electronic display may bemanufactured as a display having pixel elements disposed on separatefrontplane and backplane substrates formed of the same or differentflexible material. In some cases, such as the case in which e-paper isused as the flexible display, a separate layer of material may bedisposed between the frontplane and the backplane materials to formpixel elements. In any case, these substrate materials may be placedtogether to form the flexible electronic display, which may then bedisposed on the flexible support, such as a leather support, a bendablemetal support, etc., the combination of which can be flexed or curved invarious manners to conform to the shape of a portion of a wearer's body,such as a wrist, or to conform to the shape of other items to which theattachable article may be attached. In another case, the attachableelectronic device may include a flexible, for example, transparent,touch screen interface disposed over or on top of the flexibleelectronic display to enable a user to input data or take input actionswith respect to the flexible electronic display. If desired, the inputsmay be in the form of gestures or other inputs that are detected byother sensors included in the dynamically flexible, attachable device,and the gestures detected by the sensors may cause the electronic deviceto operate in a predetermined manner, such as to change modes ofoperation, etc.

The electronic display device so formed may, for example, enable a userto have a single type or multiple different types of digital mediadepicted or displayed on the electronic display at the same time,including, for example, photographs, digital artwork created by the useror others, messages sent to or created by the user, reminders, notesthat provide instructive, educational or inspirational messages,e-cards, advertisements, personalized agendas, calendars, such as apersonalized Outlook® calendar, etc.

More particularly, the display driver may be configurable to drive theelectronic display by displaying thereon one or more images, messages,digital artwork, videos, etc., stored in the memory. In some cases, thedisplay driver is connected to a set of electrodes or connectors that,in turn, are connected to the pixel elements of the flexible display,and the display driver provides respective content to each electrode orconnector to produce the image displayed on the flexible display. Thedisplay driver may display a fixed image via the flexible electronicdisplay, may change the image being displayed on the flexible electronicdisplay from time to time, such as by accessing the memory and providinga new image to the display, may display videos, such as real timevideos, and/or may display other types of digital media. Likewise, thedisplay driver may cause various interfaces associated with manydifferent applications at different times or in different modes of theattachable electronic device to be presented on the flexible display.For example, the display driver may be driven by various differentapplications executed in the processor to display a calendar interface,an e-mail in-box interface, an alarm clock interface, a keyboardinterface, a step-counter interface, etc. These interfaces may belocated on the same place on the flexible display and displayed atdifferent times and may be located at different places on the flexibledisplay and displayed at the same or at different times.

Still further, a battery charger unit may be connected to the batteryand may operate to charge the battery using, for example, an inductivelycoupled charging technique or a directly coupled charging technique. Thebattery charger unit may be, for example, a part of an inductivelycoupled charging system and may respond to electromagnetic wavesproduced by an exterior charging unit to charge the battery when theattachable article is disposed near the external charging unit. Inanother case, the battery charger may be a kinetic energy charger unitthat converts motion of the device (such as that associated withmovement of an arm when the attachable electronic device is in the formof a wristband) into electrical energy which is then used to charge thebattery.

Still further, a communications module may enable the processor, thedriver, the memory and/or the flexible electronic display to communicatewith external sources or devices, such as a computer, a mobile phone, atablet device, a remote control unit, etc., using, for example, wirelesscommunications associated with a Wi-Fi network, a cellular network, aBluetooth connection, a near-field communications (NFC) connection, aninfrared communication technique, a radio frequency identification(RFID) device or tag, etc. The communications module may operate toenable the driver to receive new images or other digital media forstorage in the memory and ultimate display on the flexible electronicdisplay, new applications for execution by the processor or driver toperform control of the electronic display in various manners and newconfiguration information for configuring the manner in which thedisplay driver controls the flexible electronic display to operate todisplay images and other information. In this manner, a user mayreprogram the attachable article via, for example, a wirelesscommunication network to display different pictures, images, messages,etc., at different times, to execute different applications at differenttimes or in different locations. The communications module operates toeliminate the need for the attachable device to be plugged into acomputer, or otherwise to have wires connected thereto for writinginformation to the memory of the device.

Still further, the memory may store, and the processor may execute, oneor more applications provided or downloaded to the attachable electronicdevice by the user. These applications may enable the user to direct orprogram the operational features of the attachable device with theflexible electronic display, such as the particular digital media orimages to display at any given time, the order in which images are to bedisplayed, the speed at which images will change, display features, suchas background colors, borders, visual effects, etc. Moreover, theapplications may enable or perform communications via the communicationsmodule to obtain information that may be displayed on the flexibleelectronic display, such as e-cards, advertising or promotionalinformation, etc., provided via, for example, a Wi-Fi connection, acellular connection, a Bluetooth or NFC connection, or any otherwireless communications network or connection.

In one case, the processor, which may be a generally purposemicro-processor type of controller or a special purpose controller, thebattery, the battery charger unit, the computer readable memory and thecommunications module may be integrated within, for example, an endpieceor a side wall of the attachable article or in a separate rigid module,and these components may be sealed or otherwise protected from water,air, dirt, etc. to which the exterior of the device is exposed. Any orall of these electronic components may be encapsulated in a hermeticallysealed manner to prevent any direct exposure of these components toexterior forces and environmental hazards.

Still further, the flexible support of the attachable article mayincorporate various types of structure to protect the flexible displayby, for example, limiting the possible types of motion that the flexibledisplay can undergo. These types of structures can, for example, includea set of transverse bars, stays or stints disposed in or on the flexiblesupport to limit the torsional motion of the flexible support to therebyprevent damage to the flexible display due to torsional bending of theflexible display. In a similar manner one or more longitudinal membersmay be configured within the flexible support to limit the bendingmotion of the flexible support around either a longitudinal axis of thedevice or about a transverse axis of the device. This structure thusprevents or limits flexing of the flexible display in one or moredirections so as to prevent damage to the flexible display from bendingmotions that might delaminate the various layers of the flexibleelectronic display. Still further, the flexible support may include anedge or ridge formed of, for example, a metal wire or other materialthat is disposed along the edges of the flexible display to prevent orlimit damage to the flexible electronic display by impacts at the edgeor side of the flexible electronic display.

Still further, the flexible electronic display be configured to presentthe maximal useable display area on upper the surface of the attachablearticle by being formed such that the edges of the flexible display onwhich lead lines that are used to energize a display area of theflexible display are bent or folded down or under the display. Such aconfiguration limits or reduces the need to have an area on the upper orouter surface of the attachable article at which no display pixels arelocated.

In one embodiment, an attachable article includes a band having aflexible substrate, a flexible electronic display disposed on theflexible substrate, and an electronics module electronically connectedto the flexible electronic display including a display driver and aprocessor. In this case, the flexible substrate includes bendinglimiting structure elements that operate together to limit the bendingradius of the flexible substrate to a range within a bending toleranceof the flexible electronic display. If desired, the electronics modulemay be rigid, and may be coupled to the flexible substrate at, forexample, an end of the flexible substrate or at any point between twoends of the flexible substrate.

In another embodiment, an attachable article includes a generallyrectangular shaped band having first and second lateral ends and firstand second transverse sides extending between the first and secondlateral ends, the band including a flexible substrate having amultiplicity of interconnected pieces that each extend between the firstand second transverse sides of the band and that operate together tolimit the bending motion of the flexible substrate to a particularminimum bending radius. The attachable article may also include aflexible electronic display disposed on the flexible substrate, theflexible electronic display having a minimum critical bending radius atwhich the flexible electronic display can be bent without impairingelectronic functionality of the flexible electronic display. Such aminimum critical bending radius may be the bending radius past which theelectronic functionality of the flexible display becomes impaired upon asingle or a low number of bendings (e.g., bending the flexible displaypast the minimum critical bending radius the first, second, third, etc.,time results in impaired functionality), or may be the bending radiuspast which the electronic functionality of the flexible display is notreliable or may become impaired upon a significant number of bendingmotions (e.g., the minimum critical bending radius may be the largestminimum radius at which the electronic display may be reliably bent asignificant number of times without becoming impaired). Still further,an electronics module is electronically connected to the flexibleelectronic display and includes a display driver coupled to the flexibleelectronic display and a processor coupled to the display driver. Inthis case, the particular minimal bending radius of the flexiblesubstrate in the lateral direction of the band is greater than or equalto the minimal critical bending radius of the flexible electronicdisplay in the lateral direction of the band.

Additionally, in any of these embodiments, the band may include firstand second ends and a clasp mechanism may be coupled to one or both ofthe first and second ends of the band to couple the first and secondends of the flexible substrate together. The clasp mechanism may includeone or more magnets and may further include a first set of unevengrooves or notches disposed at one portion of the band and acorresponding second set of uneven grooves or notches disposed at asecond portion of the band for mating with the first set of unevengrooves or notches. In another case, the clasp mechanism may include amultiplicity of magnets disposed in series along at least one end of theband and the clasp mechanism may be adjustable to enable the first andsecond ends of the band to be moved to different overlapping positionswith respect to one another. If desired, the clasp mechanism may includea series of magnets disposed along the first end of the band and aseries of magnetically permeable material elements, such as metal ormagnets, disposed along the second end of the band, or may include atleast one magnet disposed at a first lateral end of the band and amagnetically permeable material disposed at a second and oppositelateral end of the band. The clasping mechanism may further include atab disposed at one of the first and second lateral ends of the band anda groove that accepts the tab disposed at the other of the first andsecond lateral ends of the band. In still other embodiments, the claspmechanism may include a hook and loop structure coupled to the band or abuckle connected to one end of the band that accepts the other end ofthe band through the buckle.

If desired, the flexible substrate may include a series of rigid piecesof material interconnected with hinges, wherein the hinges limit bendingof the flexible electronic display when disposed on the flexiblesubstrate within the bending tolerance of the flexible electronicdisplay. The rigid pieces of material may be disposed laterally alongthe band and the hinges may include protrusions that interact to limitthe range of bending motion of the hinge. Likewise, the flexiblesubstrate may include a flexible material with rigid elements spacedlaterally apart along the flexible material and the rigid elements mayoperate to limit bending of the flexible substrate in the transversedirection of the band more than in the lateral direction of the band. Ina still further embodiment, the flexible substrate may include a pliablematerial having a first uninterrupted section disposed closest to theflexible electronic display and having a second section disposedadjacent the first section and having grooves disposed therein, whereinthe grooves extend from one side of the flexible substrate to the otherside of the flexible substrate. If desired, the second section mayfurther include one or more lateral grooves disposed therein, whereinthe lateral grooves extend at least partially from one lateral end ofthe flexible substrate to the other lateral end of the flexiblesubstrate. Additionally, the flexible substrate may have two portionsdisposed laterally adjacent to one another, wherein the first portioncan be bent to a minimum radius of curvature that is different than theminimum radius of curvature to which the second portion can be bent.Also, the flexible substrate may have a plurality of sections disposedlaterally with respect to one another along the band, wherein eachsection can be bent to one of a multiplicity of minimum radii ofcurvature, and wherein at least two of the sections can be bent to aminimum radius of curvature that is less the minimum radius of curvatureof one of the other sections. In a still further case, the flexiblesubstrate may have an edge piece that extends above the flexibleelectronic display at each transverse side (i.e., the sides disposed atthe edges in the transverse direction, or the sides extending in thelateral direction between the lateral ends) the of the flexibleelectronic display and the edge pieces may include a first bendablepiece of material disposed inside of a soft pliable material. In thiscase, the first bendable piece of material may be harder than the softpliable material.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of an example dynamically flexible,attachable article in the form of a wristband having a flexible displaydisposed thereon and a first type of magnetic clasp.

FIG. 2 is a side view of the wristband of FIG. 1 bent to form a fixedlength wristband.

FIG. 3 is a perspective view of an example attachable article in theform of a wristband having a flexible display disposed thereon with asecond type of magnetic clasp.

FIG. 4 is a side view of the example attachable article of FIG. 3 bentto form an adjustable length wristband.

FIG. 5A is a side view of an example attachable article of FIG. 1 havinga flexible display disposed on a flexible substrate between two clasps.

FIG. 5B is a side view of an example attachable article in the form of awristband having a flexible display disposed over an entire length of asubstrate.

FIG. 5C is a side view of an example attachable article in the form of awristband having a flexible display disposed on a center portion of aflexible substrate.

FIG. 5D is a side view of an example attachable article in the form of awristband device having a flexible display disposed over a substratehaving two flexible end pieces connected by an electronics module.

FIG. 6 is a side view of an example attachable article in the form of awristband device having a flexible touch screen disposed on a flexibledisplay and a flexible substrate which are disposed between two clasps.

FIGS. 7A and 7B illustrate a perspective and top view, respectively, ofan example attachable article in the form of a wristband device havingmagnetic members disposed on one or both ends or sides of the wristbanddevice to form an adjustable connection or clasping structure.

FIGS. 7C-7E illustrate various sensors disposed on a wristband devicesimilar to that of FIGS. 7A and 7B.

FIGS. 8A and 8B illustrate an example attachable article in the form ofa wristband device having a flexible display and a connection structurethat includes magnets and a tab and recess arrangement.

FIGS. 9-12 illustrate an example attachable article in the form of awristband device having a flexible display and a different connectionstructure that includes magnets and interlocking grooves and that isconfigured to provide maximal continuous display surface to a user whenwearing the band.

FIGS. 13A-13C illustrate a bottom view, a side view and a top view,respectively, of a wristband device configured to provide maximalcontinuous display surface to a user when wearing the band.

FIG. 14A illustrates the band of FIG. 13 when the ends thereof areconnected together to form a maximal continuous display surface for auser.

FIG. 14B illustrates the band of FIG. 14A when connected around a user'swrist.

FIG. 15 illustrates in more detail the manner in which the claspstructure of the band of FIG. 13 operates.

FIGS. 16A-16C depict the band of FIG. 13 adjusted to fit variousdifferent sized wrists to illustrate the positioning of the band overlapwith respect to a user's wrist while providing maximal continuoususeable display surface area to the user.

FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the band of FIG. 13 laid out in a flatconfiguration.

FIG. 18 depicts a further configuration of a band similar to that ofFIG. 12, having an electronics module disposed on one end and that isconfigured to provide maximal continuous display surface to a user whenwearing the band.

FIGS. 19 and 20 illustrate a further example of an attachable article inthe form of a wristband having a flexible display and a connection orclasp that includes magnets and a clasp loop while being configured toprovide a maximal continuous display surface to a user when wearing theband.

FIGS. 21-24 illustrate a still further example attachable article in theform of a wristband device having a flexible electronic display and aconnection or clasping structure that includes magnets and a buckleclasp while being configured to provide a maximal continuous usabledisplay surface to a user when wearing the band.

FIGS. 25A-25B illustrate a top and a cross-sectional view of a flexiblewristband device having a structure that protects the edges of aflexible electronic display disposed thereon.

FIG. 26 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a flexible wristbanddevice illustrating further side protection structure for protecting theedges of a flexible electronic display.

FIG. 27A illustrates a top view of a flexible support of a wristbanddevice having a torsional and transverse bending limiting structure inthe form of a number of transverse spacers.

FIG. 27B illustrates a top view of a flexible support of a wristbandhaving a torsional and transverse bending limiting structure in the formof a number of transverse spacers spaced at different distances from oneanother.

FIGS. 28-29 illustrate a flexible support of a wristband having atorsional, transverse and lateral bending limiting structure in the formof a plurality of grooves formed in an underside of the flexible supportand evenly spaced from one another.

FIG. 30 illustrates a wristband device disposed along an arm of a userto form an armband.

FIG. 31 illustrates an armband device disposed around the arm of a userusing the principles described herein.

FIGS. 32 and 33 illustrate a flexible support of a wristband having atorsional, lateral and transverse bending limiting structure in the formof a plurality of grooves formed in an underside of the flexible supportand spaced apart from one another at various distances.

FIG. 34 illustrates a partial perspective view of a flexible support ofa wristband having torsional, transverse and lateral bending limitingstructure in the form of a number of longitudinal and transverse groovesformed in the flexible support.

FIGS. 35-41 illustrate views of various bending limiting members thatlimit the flexing motion of a flexible support in at least one directionwhile allowing particular flexing motion in another or oppositedirection.

FIG. 42 illustrates a top view of a bending or flexing limitingstructure forming a flexible support, formed as a series of transverselyinterconnected longitudinal members, each longitudinal member made up ofa set of longitudinally disposed links.

FIG. 43 illustrates a top view of a flexible support of a wristbanddevice having bending limiting structure of any of FIGS. 35-41 disposedtherein.

FIG. 44 illustrates a top view of a flexible support of a wristbanddevice that includes a combination of uniformly constructed portions andhinged portions with each portion have a different flexibility from anadjacent portion, to provide a support for a flexible electronicdisplay, to produce a device that includes various different bendingcharacteristics at different locations or sections of the flexiblesupport.

FIGS. 45A-45D illustrate an example attachable article in the form of awristband having a flexible electronic display and a flexible supportslidably and removably coupled therewith in a manner that minimizes orreduces strain on the flexible electronic display during bending.

FIG. 45E illustrates the attachable article depicted in FIGS. 45A-45Dwhen bent or curved.

FIG. 45F illustrates the attachable article depicted in FIG. 45E havinga second and different flexible support than that illustrated in FIG.45E.

FIGS. 46A and 46B illustrate another example attachable article in theform of a wristband having a flexible electronic display slidablycoupled to a flexible support in a manner that minimizes or reducesstrain on the flexible display during bending.

FIG. 46C illustrates a top view of the attachable article depicted inFIGS. 46A and 46B.

FIG. 46D illustrates the attachable article depicted in FIGS. 46A and46B when bent or curved.

FIGS. 46E and 46F illustrate another example attachable article in theform of a wristband having a flexible electronic display slidablycoupled to a flexible support having a transparent layer, in a mannerthat minimizes or reduces strain on the flexible display during bending.

FIG. 46G illustrates a top view of the attachable article depicted inFIGS. 46E and 46F.

FIG. 46H illustrates the attachable article depicted in FIGS. 46E and46F when bent or curved.

FIG. 47A depicts an exploded view of a further example of an attachablearticle in the form of a wristband having a flexible electronic displayattached to a highly flexible and elastic support structure that is, inturn, slidably coupled to another flexible support structure in a mannerthat provides support to the flexible electronic display whileminimizing or reducing strain on the flexible electronic display duringbending.

FIG. 47B depicts an end cut-away view of the attachable article of FIG.47A.

FIG. 47C depicts the attachable article depicted in FIGS. 47A and 47Bwhen bent or curved.

FIG. 47D depicts an exploded view of a further example of an attachablearticle in the form of a wristband having a highly flexible and elasticsupport structure configured to receive a flexible electronic displayand another flexible support structure, the another flexible supportstructure being slidably coupled to the flexible electronic display in amanner that provides support to the flexible electronic display whileminimizing or reducing strain on the flexible electronic display duringbending.

FIG. 47E depicts an end cut-away view of the attachable article of FIG.47D.

FIG. 47F depicts the attachable article depicted in FIGS. 47D and 47Ewhen bent or curved.

FIG. 47G depicts a perspective view of a further example of anattachable article in the form of a wristband having a highly flexibleand elastic support structure configured to receive a flexibleelectronic display and another flexible support structure, the anotherflexible support structure being slidably coupled to the flexibleelectronic display in a manner that provides support to the flexibleelectronic display while minimizing or reducing strain on the flexibleelectronic display during bending.

FIG. 47H depicts a cross-sectional view of the attachable article ofFIG. 47G when bent or curved.

FIG. 47I depicts a cross-sectional view of the attachable article ofFIG. 47G when the article is in a substantially flat position.

FIG. 47J depicts a perspective view of a further example of anattachable article in the form of a wristband having a highly flexibleand elastic support structure configured to receive a flexibleelectronic display and another flexible support structure, the anotherflexible support structure being slidably coupled to the flexibleelectronic display in a manner that provides support to the flexibleelectronic display while minimizing or reducing strain on the flexibleelectronic display during bending.

FIG. 47K depicts a cross-sectional view of the attachable article ofFIG. 47G when bent or curved.

FIG. 47L depicts a cross-sectional view of the attachable article ofFIG. 47G when the article is in a substantially flat position.

FIG. 48A is a perspective view of one side of an example article havingflexible electronic components disposed on two surfaces of the article;

FIG. 48B is a perspective view of another side of the example article ofFIG. 48A;

FIG. 48C is a perspective view of a flexed or bent state of the examplearticle of FIGS. 48A and 48B;

FIG. 48D is a perspective view of a flexed and overlapping state of theexample article of FIGS. 48A, 48B, and 48C;

FIG. 49A is a perspective view of one side of another example articlehaving flexible electronic components disposed on two surfaces of thearticle;

FIG. 49B is a perspective view of another side of the example article ofFIG. 49B;

FIG. 50 illustrates a process of bending an article from a firstposition to a second position so as to utilize flexible electroniccomponents on both sides of the article, such as one of the articlesdepicted in FIGS. 48A, 48B, 48C, 48D, 49A, and 49B;

FIGS. 51A and 51B illustrate example wearable applications of an articlehaving flexible electronic components disposed on two surfaces of thearticle, such as one of the articles depicted in FIGS. 48A, 48B, 48C,48D, 49A, and 49B;

FIGS. 52A and 52B illustrate another example attachable article in theform of a wristband having multiple flexible electronic componentsslidably coupled to a flexible support;

FIGS. 53A and 53B illustrate another example attachable article in theform of a wristband having a flexible electronic component and amechanical support component slidably coupled to a flexible support;

FIGS. 54A and 54B illustrate another example attachable article in theform of a wristband having multiple flexible electronic componentsslidably coupled to a flexible support;

FIGS. 55A and 55B illustrate another example attachable article in theform of a wristband having multiple flexible electronic componentsslidably coupled to a flexible support;

FIGS. 56A and 56B illustrate another example attachable article in theform of a wristband having a flexible electronic display assembly and asecondary flexible electronic component slidably coupled to a flexiblesupport;

FIGS. 57A and 57B illustrate another example attachable article in theform of a wristband having multiple flexible electronic componentsslidably coupled to a flexible support and a spring element;

FIGS. 58A, 58B, 58C, and 58D illustrate other example attachablearticles in the form of a wristband having multiple flexible electroniccomponents slidably coupled to a flexible support with components orshapes to promote sliding;

FIG. 59 is a side view of an article having a flexible electroniccomponent, an interlayer coupled to the flexible electronic component,and a flexible support structure coupled to the flexible electroniccomponent via the interlayer, the flexible support structure beingconfigured to limit bending of the flexible electronic component andprovide torsion protection for the flexible electronic component.

FIG. 60A is a perspective view of an example attachable article, in theform of a wristband, having a flexible display and a first type offlexible support structure coupled to the flexible display via aninterlayer, the flexible support structure including a first substrateand a second substrate movably connected to the first substrate, suchthat the flexible support structure can limit bending of the flexibledisplay and provide torsion protection for the flexible display.

FIG. 60B is a side view of the attachable article illustrated in FIG.60A bent or curved in an outward direction.

FIG. 60C is a perspective view of the first substrate of the first typeof flexible support structure illustrated in FIG. 60A.

FIG. 60D is a close-up perspective view of a portion of the firstsubstrate illustrated in FIG. 60C.

FIG. 60E is a perspective view of the second substrate of the first typeof flexible support structure illustrated in FIG. 60A.

FIG. 60F is a close-up perspective view of a portion of the secondsubstrate illustrated in FIG. 60E.

FIG. 60G is a perspective view illustrating the first substrateillustrated in FIGS. 2C and 2D and the second substrate illustrated inFIGS. 60E and 60F movably connected to form the flexible supportstructure illustrated in FIG. 60A.

FIG. 60H is a close-up perspective view of a portion of the flexiblesupport structure illustrated in FIG. 60G.

FIG. 60I illustrate a portion of the flexible support structureillustrated in FIG. 60G bent or curved in an outward direction.

FIG. 60J illustrate a portion of the flexible support structureillustrated in FIG. 60G bent or curved in an inward direction.

FIGS. 61A and 61B illustrate a different example of the first type offlexible support structure illustrated in FIGS. 60A-60J, the first typeof flexible support structure having slots and projections of differentlengths such that the first type of flexible support structure has anoval-shape.

FIGS. 62A and 62B illustrate a first example of an adjustable flexiblesupport structure, the adjustable flexible support structure includingtwo pairs of user-selectable slots that define different lengths andthus permit the user to adjust the shape and size of the flexiblesupport structure.

FIGS. 62C and 62D illustrate a second example of an adjustable flexiblesupport structure including three pairs of user-selectable slots thatdefine different lengths and thus permit the user to adjust the shapeand size of the flexible support structure.

FIGS. 62E and 62F illustrate a third example of an adjustable flexiblesupport structure including three user-selectable slots that definedifferent lengths and thus permit the user to adjust the shape and sizeof the flexible support structure.

FIGS. 62G and 62H illustrate a fourth example of an adjustable flexiblesupport structure including user-selectable fixation points that definedifferent lengths and thus permit the user to adjust the shape and sizeof the flexible support structure.

FIG. 63A is a perspective view of an example attachable article, in theform of a wristband, having a flexible display and a second type offlexible support structure coupled to the flexible display via aninterlayer, the flexible support structure including a first substrateand a second substrate movably connected to the first substrate, suchthat the flexible support structure can limit bending of the flexibledisplay and provide torsion protection for the flexible display.

FIG. 63B is a side view of the attachable article illustrated in FIG.63A bent or curved in an outward direction.

FIG. 63C is a perspective view of the first substrate of the second typeof flexible support structure illustrated in FIG. 63A.

FIG. 63D is a close-up perspective view of a portion of the firstsubstrate illustrated in FIG. 63C.

FIG. 63E is a perspective view of the second substrate of the secondtype of flexible support structure illustrated in FIG. 63A.

FIG. 63F is a close-up perspective view of a portion of the secondsubstrate illustrated in FIG. 63E.

FIG. 63G is a perspective view illustrating the first substrateillustrated in FIGS. 63C and 63D and the second substrate illustrated inFIGS. 63E and 63F movably connected to form the flexible supportstructure illustrated in FIG. 63A.

FIG. 63H is a close-up perspective view of a portion of the flexiblesupport structure illustrated in FIG. 63G.

FIG. 63I is a side view of a portion of the flexible support structureillustrated in FIG. 63G bent or curved in an outward direction.

FIG. 63J is a side view of a portion of the flexible support structureillustrated in FIG. 63G bent or curved in an inward direction.

FIG. 64A is a side view of an another example article having a flexibleOLED light and a flexible support structure coupled to the flexibleelectronic component via an interlayer, the flexible support structureincluding a first substrate and a second substrate movably connected tothe first substrate, such that the flexible support structure can limitbending of the flexible OLED light and provide torsion protection forthe flexible OLED light.

FIG. 64B is a perspective view of another example article having acollapsible e-reader and a flexible support structure coupled to thee-reader via an interlayer, the flexible support structure including afirst substrate and a second substrate movably connected to the firstsubstrate, such that the flexible support structure can limit bending ofthe collapsible e-reader and provide torsion protection for thecollapsible e-reader.

FIG. 65 is a block diagram of an electronics module associated with theattachable articles described herein.

FIG. 66A is a side view of an example attachable article attached toitself in a looped configuration and including pressure sensors,

FIGS. 66B and 66C illustrate the attachable article of FIG. 66A beingcompressed by outside forces.

FIG. 67 is a surface view of a portion of a band of an exampleattachable article including a strain gauge.

FIG. 68 is a side view of a portion of the band of an example attachablearticle including two strain gauges.

FIG. 69 illustrates a top view of a backplane layer of a flexibleelectronic display as formed on a flexible display element substrate.

FIG. 70 illustrates a manner of bending the flexible display elementsubstrate of FIG. 69 to form a flexible display with maximal displayarea on the top of a wristband device.

FIG. 71 illustrates an end view of a flexible display configured asprovided in FIG. 70 disposed within flexible support with sideprotection structure

FIGS. 72A-72E illustrate various example display images that can beprovided on a wristband device in different operational modes of thewristband device.

FIGS. 73A and 73B illustrate the wristband device of FIG. 1 or 3disposed adjacent to one or more location detection strips in a straightconfiguration and a curved configuration, respectively, to form awristband detection system.

FIG. 74 illustrates the use of the wristband device detection system ofFIGS. 73A and 73B in various different places or attached to variousdifferent articles to change the default functionality of the wristbanddevice.

FIG. 75 illustrates a stand that may accept and hold one of thewristband devices disclosed herein, such as that of FIG. 17, when notbeing worn by a user.

FIG. 76 illustrates the stand of FIG. 75 with the wristband device ofFIG. 17 disposed thereon.

FIG. 77 illustrates an example computer system with a configurationscreen that may be used to implement or specify the configuration of awristband device having a flexible display.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Referring now to FIG. 1, a dynamically flexible, attachable article 10,which is illustrated to be in the form of a wristband, includes aflexible band portion 12, which is generally rectangular in shape andconfiguration, disposed between two ends, which may include end piecesor fasteners 14. The band portion 12 includes a flexible support 16 anda flexible electronic display 18 disposed on the support 16 to beviewable from the top of the band 12, as illustrated in FIG. 1. One ormore of the fasteners, end pieces, ends, or clasps 14, each of which maybe made of hard plastic, metal, or other rigid material, but couldinstead be made of a pliable material, may include various electroniccomponents therein for driving the flexible electronic display 18 andfor providing other electronic functionality for the article 10.Additionally or alternatively, one or more various electronic componentsmay be disposed in one or more electronic modules that are attached tothe band 12 at locations other than at the ends of the band 12, such asin the fasteners 14.

As illustrated in FIG. 1, one or both of the end pieces or clasps 14 mayinclude a connection structure therein that functions to connect the endpieces 14 together when the band portion 12 is bent, as illustrated inFIG. 2, to form a circular or oval band. In one case, the connectionstructure may be in the form of magnetic materials 20A and 20B disposedin or on each of the clasps 14, wherein the materials 20A and 20Boperate, when in close proximity to one another, to hold the end piecesor clasps 14 together. The magnetic materials 20A and 20B can each be apermanent magnet, or one of the materials 20A or 20B can be a permanentmagnet while the other material 20A or 20B can be a magneticallypermeable material, such as many kinds of metal. The magnetic materials20A and 20B can be disposed at the longitudinal ends of the clasps 14 sothat the clasps 14 connect end-to-end when the band 12 is bent to allowthe clasps 14 to meet up with each other end-to-end, as illustrated inFIG. 2. In the case in which the materials 20A and 20B are bothpermanent magnets, the materials 20A and 20B may be disposed in ends ofthe clasps 14 so that opposite poles of the permanent magnets are facingoutwardly from the clasps 14 or so that the magnets have theirrespective north poles facing in opposite directions when the bandportion 12 is bent in the manner shown in FIG. 2 (e.g., so that a southpole of one of the magnets 20A and 20B meets or mates with a north poleof the other one of the magnets 20A and 20B). As will be understood, theconfiguration and placement of the materials 20A and 20B in the clasps14 in the manner illustrated in FIG. 1 enables the device 10 to beclasped in a continuous circle with a fixed or predetermined length sothat the clasps 14 meet end-to-end.

In another embodiment illustrated in FIG. 3, the flexible attachablearticle 10, again illustrated in the form of a wristband, includes asimilar band portion 12 and end pieces or clasps 14. However, in thiscase, the clasps 14 have a connection structure in the form of magnetsdisposed on the top or bottom sides of the clasps 14 (and possibly evena portion of the band 12) to enable the device 10 to be folded around onitself in an adjustable manner as illustrated in FIG. 4, so as to createa wristband of variable length when disposed around or connected arounda wrist or other object. As illustrated in FIGS. 3 and 4, magnets ormagnetic members 22A and 22B are disposed on or near a lower side of onethe clasps 14, and come into contact or react with magnets or magneticmembers 24A and 24B disposed on or near an upper side of the other oneof the clasps 14. In some cases, the magnets or magnetically permeableelements or members 24A and 24B may be disposed within the support 16,such as in the center of the support 16, instead of on or near an upperor lower surface of the support 16. In these configurations, the clasps14 may be disposed near or on top of one another during use and are thusconnectable in various different positions with respect to one another,such as that illustrated in FIG. 4, when the flexible band 12 is bent toform a circular or oval member to be placed around a wrist, an arm,etc., for example. In this manner, the dynamically flexible, attachabledevice 10 may be easily adjustable in size to fit various differentsized wrists and arms or other mounting members. As illustrated in FIG.4, the support or flexible material 16 of the band portion 12 isillustrated as being flexed in a manner that causes the flexibleelectronic display 18 to be disposed on the exterior or outside of theband portion 12. Of course, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 4,the magnets or metallic members 22A and 22B on the one side, and themagnets or the metallic members 24A and 24B on the other side of theband portion 12 may slide or move with respect to one another in thelongitudinal direction of the device 10 so as to make the device 10variable in size or circular/oval shape to fit around different sizedwrists or other mounting members. If desired, portions of the members22A, 22B and/or 24A, 24B could be disposed in the band portion 12 inaddition to or instead of in the clasps 14 and, if so disposed, couldstill be considered as being disposed in the end portions of the band12. Still further, any or all of the magnetic members 22A, 22 b, 24A,24B could be a single, long piece of material, as illustrated in FIGS. 3and 4, or could be a series of magnetic members disposed near but notcontacting each other, to enable better registration of the north andsouth poles of the respective magnetic members in various differentlongitudinal locations of the band 12. This second configuration mayprovide for better adjustability of the length of the band 12 when bothmagnetic members 22 and 24 are permanent magnets.

Of course, the dynamically flexible, attachable device 10 could take onmany different configurations besides those illustrated in FIGS. 1-4.For example, as a reference, FIG. 5A illustrates a side view of thedevice 10 of FIGS. 1-4 in more detail. In this case, the band portion 12is illustrated as including a flexible base or a support portion 16 thatmay be made of any suitable flexible material such as, for example,cloth, leather, plastic, metal, or other material, while the flexibledisplay 18 is disposed on the support 16. The clasps 14 may be the samesize as each other and may be the same height as the flexible display 18and the support 16 together. In another case, the clasps 14 may belarger in height than the flexible display 18 and the support 16 and, inthis case, may stick out above surface of the flexible display 18 and/orbelow the bottom surface of the support 16. As noted above, one or bothof the clasps 14 may be or include an electronics module 19 that holdselectronics, such as processors, memories, sensors, batteries, etc.,that are used to power and drive the flexible display 18 and to provideother communication functionality for the device 10. In someembodiments, the electronics module 19 is not included in the clasps orfasteners 14, but is attached to the band 12 in a location separate fromthe fasteners 14. In these cases, the electronics module 19 may be evenwith the bottom of the band 12 or may stick out from the bottom of theband 12. If desired, the components of the electronics module 19 may besealed or otherwise protected from water, air, dirt, etc., to which theexterior of the device 10 is exposed. For example, any or all of theseelectronic components may be encapsulated in a hermetically sealedmanner to prevent any direct exposure of these components to exteriorforces and environmental hazards.

In another embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 5B, a dynamicallyflexible, attachable article in the form of a device 10 has the flexibledisplay 18 disposed over the entire length of the support 16 and endportions 14, which may be part of the support 16. In this case, theflexible display 18 spans the entire length of the band portion 12 andof the device 10 and thus extends from end to end of the device 10. Theconnection structure, in the form of for example, magnets (not shown inFIG. 5B) may be disposed in the end pieces 14 and/or, if desired, inportions of the flexible support 16.

In yet another configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 5C, a dynamically,flexible attachable article 10 has a flexible display 18 disposed on alimited portion of the flexible support 16 so that the flexible display18 is only disposed, in this case, in the center portion of the band 12.Of course, while not shown, the flexible display 18 could be disposed onany other portion of the band 12, including in portions offset from thecenter of the band 12 and the flexible display 18 could cover anydesired amount or portion of uppers surface of the band 12. Here again,any desired connection structure could be provided in the ends of thesupport 16, including in the clasps 14, to connect the two ends of theband 12 together.

In a still further case, as illustrated in FIG. 5D, a dynamicallyflexible, attachable article 10 has a flexible display 18 disposed overa support 16 having two flexible end pieces 16A and 16B connected by anelectronics module 19 which, in this case, is illustrated is beingdisposed in the center of the flexible support 16. The electronicsmodule 19 may or may not be made of a flexible material and in eithercase may still be part of the flexible support 16. Moreover, while beingillustrated in the center of the support 16, the electronics module 19could be disposed at any other location along the support 16 includingat any position offset from the center of the support 16. Again, anydesired connection structure could be attached to or disposed in or onthe end portions of the device 10, including the ends of the support 16.

In another embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 6, the dynamicallyflexible, attachable article 10 may be configured similarly to that ofFIGS. 1-5D, but may also include a touch screen interface 26 disposedover the flexible display 18. In particular, in this case, the touchscreen interface 26 can be a capacitive touch screen or any other typeof touch screen interface that is transparent in nature, and thus can belaid over top of the flexible display 18 to allow the flexible display18 to be viewable there-through. As will be understood, the touch screeninterface 26 of FIG. 6 is powered by and controlled by the electronicsdisposed within one or more electronics modules 19 illustrated as beingdisposed, in this case, in both of the clasps 14 to perform variousdifferent types of touch detection functionality associated with atypical touch screen display. Of course, the touch screen interface 26could be added to any of the configurations of FIGS. 5A-5D or to any ofthe other attachable article embodiments described herein.

While the device 10 of FIGS. 1-6 is generally illustrated as having aflexible display and a flexible support disposed between or includingtwo magnetically coupled clasps 14, with at least one of the clasps 14containing or operating as an electronics module 19 or with anelectronics module 19 disposed in the center of the band 12, othermanners of disposing connection structure on the device 10 and oflocating the electronics module 19 could be used instead. For example,FIGS. 7A and 7B illustrate an example dynamically, flexible attachablearticle 10 in the form of a wristband having a clasp member 14, such asone of clasps members 14 of FIGS. 1-6, disposed at one end of theflexible display 18 and a set of magnets 22 and 24 or other magneticallypermeable material disposed on or in an end piece or end portionattached to or formed as part of the other end of the flexible support16. In this case, individual magnets 22A and 22B are disposed in aspaced apart manner within the end piece 14 or are disposed in theflexible support 16 next to the end piece 14 and operate in conjunctionwith the individual magnetic materials 24 which are spaced apart anddisposed on the other end piece of the band 12 to form a secure magneticconnection when the band portion 12 is wrapped around a user's wrist,for example. The spaced apart nature of the individual magnetic members22 and 24 enable the band to be adjustable in length so that a pair ofmagnetic members 22A and 22B (on opposite sides of one end of the band12 or support 16) may meet up with any of a number of different pairs ofmagnets 24A and 24B (on opposite sides of the other end of the band 12or support 16) to enable the length of the band, when connected, to beadjustable. Of course, the magnetic members 22 and 24 may each bepermanent magnets, or one may be made of permanent magnets while theother is formed of magnetically permeable material. Moreover, the spacedapart magnetic material configuration of FIGS. 7A and 7B may be used inany of the embodiments illustrated in FIGS. 1-6 or other embodimentsdiscussed herein.

FIGS. 7C-7E illustrate attachable articles similar to that of FIGS. 7Aand 7B but including various different types of sensors that may be usedfor various purposes, including in detecting the orientation of theband, such as whether the band is wrapped around a user's wrist or otherelement. In particular, FIGS. 7C-7E illustrate various examples of anattachable article in the form of a wristband device 10 that includesand adjustable clamp or connection mechanism for enabling the ends ofthe band of the device 10 to overlap one another by different distanceswhen worn so as to enable the wristband device 10 to be used on wristsof different sizes. In addition, however, each of the various devices inFIGS. 7C-7E include mechanisms for determining or enabling theelectronics module 19 of the device 10 to determine the orientation ofthe band with respect to the user's wrist when being worn to enablebetter operation of the display features of the device 10. While amagnetic connection or clamping structure is illustrated in each of thedevices 10 in FIGS. 7C-7E, other types of adjustable clamping orconnection structure could be used instead.

More particularly, FIG. 7C illustrates an example attachable article inthe form of a wristband device 10 having an adjustable claspingmechanism in the form of one or more magnets 22A, 22B, 24A, 24B such asthat illustrated with respect to FIGS. 7A and 7B and an electronicsmodule 19 disposed or centered on the flexible substrate or band support16 at approximately one third of the length of the band 16 from one endof the band 16 and two-thirds of the length of the band 16 from theother end of the band 16. In addition, the device 10 of FIG. 7C includesa flexible touchscreen interface 26 disposed over the flexibleelectronic display 18.

FIG. 7D illustrates another example attachable article in the form of awristband device 10 having an adjustable clasping mechanism in the formof one or more magnets 22A, 22B, 24A, 24B such as that illustrated withrespect to FIGS. 7A and 7B and an electronics module 19 disposed orcentered on the flexible substrate or band support 16 at approximatelyone third of the length of the band support 16 from one end of the band16 and two-thirds of the length of the band 16 from the other end of theband support 16. However, in this case, one or more pressure sensors 27are disposed in or on the band support 16 and are electronicallyconnected to the electronics module 19 to provide signals to theelectronics module 19 indicative of pressure, strain, or force appliedto those locations of the band 16. While the pressure sensors 27 areindicated to be disposed at various points along the length on the bandsupport 16 on both sides of the band support 16 near the ends of thesupport 16, these sensors may be disposed along the entire band support16, only on one side of the support 16, or on any suitable portion ofthe support 16 for the purpose of detecting pressure or force applied tothe band support 16 or display screen 18. Still further, the pressuresensors 27 may be any desired or suitable pressure sensors includingpiezoelectric sensors, strain gauges, etc. Additionally, any desirednumber of sensors 27 may be used and these sensors 27 may be spacedapart from one another any suitable distance along the length of theband support 16. Likewise, the sensors 27 may be disposed in the centerof the band support 16 (from side to side) or offset from the center.Also, more than one sensor 27 may be located at any longitudinal orlateral location along the band support 16. Alternatively, the sensors27 of FIG. 7D could be magnetic sensors which sense magnetic fieldstrength, for example. In this case, the magnetic sensors 27 may detectwhether one or more magnets on one end of the band (used a part of thecoupling mechanism) are near to or are interacting with magnets ormagnetic material on the other end of the band. Here, the magneticsensors 27 may be used to detect the amount of overlap of the ends ofthe band.

FIG. 7E illustrates another example attachable article in the form of awristband device 10 having an adjustable clasping mechanism in the formof one or more magnets 22A, 22B, 24A, 24B such as that illustrated withrespect to FIGS. 7A and 7B and an electronics module 19 disposed orcentered on the flexible substrate or band support 16 at approximatelyone third of the length of the band support 16 from one end of the band16 and two-thirds of the length of the band 16 from the other end of theband support 16. However, in this case, a gyroscopic detection element29 is disposed in the electronic module 19 and operates to detect theorientation of the band (or at least the electronics module 19 or otherlocation at which the gyroscopic element 29 is disposed). The gyroscopicelement 29 may operate to detect the orientation of the band withrespect to gravity or other acceleration forces to which the element 29is subjected. While a single gyroscopic element 29 is illustrated asbeing disposed in the electronics module 19 of FIG. 7E, this or similarelements could be disposed at other locations along the band (e.g.,within the support 16 of the band) and/or multiple gyroscopic elements29 could be disposed at various locations along the support 16.

Generally speaking, the embodiments of FIGS. 7C-7E include structure orelements, such as a touchscreen interface 26, pressure or magneticsensors 27 or gyroscopic elements 29 that can be used to assist theelectronics module 19 in determining the orientation or positioning ofthe wristband support 16 or the display 18 with respect to one or morefixed locations on a user's wrist when the device 10 is wrapped aroundthe user's wrist, to detect gestures made by the wearer of the band,etc. This operation enables the module 19 to then calibrate the display18 to place or center display information such as display screens atparticular locations with respect to the user's wrist, such as beingcentered on the top of the wrist, on the bottom of the wrist, on theinner side of the wrist, on the outer side of the wrist, etc. Likewise,these elements or sensors may be used to detect user inputs and bandorientation or location.

Moreover, while FIGS. 1-7 illustrate magnetic based connectionstructures, other connection structures, such as one or more mechanicalconnectors (e.g., buckles, snap components, etc.), any desired hook andloop connection material, like Velcro, or some other connection means,etc. could be used instead of or in addition to any of theabove-described magnetically coupled connection structures. In theembodiments in which the article 10 includes a connection structure thatutilizes one or more mechanical connectors in combination with one anyof the above-described magnetically coupled connection structures, theconnection structure can provide both a magnetic connection and amechanical connection, and, thus, the connection structure provides astronger and more durable connection between the end pieces 14 of thearticle 10 or between the various portions of the band or support 16. Inthese cases, the magnetic connectors can, but need not, be disposed nearor proximate to the mechanical connectors.

As an example, FIGS. 8A and 8B illustrate a set of magnetic connectorsused in conjunction with a mechanical connector to effect a claspingstructure in a fixed length band. In the embodiment illustrated in FIG.8A, the flexible attachable article 10, again illustrated in the form ofa wristband, includes a similar band portion 12 and end pieces or clasps14. However, in this embodiment, the article 10 has a connectionstructure that not only includes magnets 20A, and 20B disposed at thelateral ends of the band portion 12, as described above in connectionwith FIGS. 1 and 2, but also includes mechanical connectors that caneffectuate a mechanical connection between the end pieces or clasps 14,such that the clasps 14 can be mechanically and magnetically connectedto one another when the device 10 is bent, as illustrated in FIG. 8B, toform a circular or oval band. In FIGS. 8A and 8B, the mechanicalconnectors take the form of a recess 300 that is formed or defined inthe longitudinal or lateral end of one of the clasps 14 and a tab 304that is formed or defined on, and extends laterally outward from, thelongitudinal or lateral end of the other one of the clasps 14. The tab304 can be disposed or inserted into the recess 300 to mechanicallyconnect the longitudinal ends of the opposing clasps 14 to one anotherwhen the flexible band 12 is bent to be disposed around or on a wrist,an arm, etc., for example. At the same time, the magnets 20A and 20B, byvirtue of being in proximity to one another as shown in FIG. 8B, createor provide a magnetic force that also serves to hold the clasps 14together. In this manner, the connection structure described inconnection with FIGS. 8A and 8B can provide a stronger, more durableconnection when the clasps 14 are connected in an end-to-end arrangementso that the device 10 is clasped in a continuous circle or oval with afixed or predetermined length.

In another embodiment illustrated in FIGS. 9-12, the flexible attachablearticle 10, which is again illustrated in the form of a wristband,includes a similar band portion 12 having one or more ends 14, and anelectronics module 19 disposed at or on one of the ends 14. In thisembodiment, the article 10 also includes the magnets 22A, 22B, 24A, and24B described above, but includes different mechanical connectors thanthe article 10 illustrated in connection with FIGS. 8A and 8B. In theband device of FIGS. 9-11, the mechanical connectors take the form of aplurality of grooves or notches 320 formed on the band 12 and aplurality of projections (also called grooves or notches) 324 formed onthe module 19 which are configured to, mate with, engage and/or retainthe corresponding grooves or notches 320 therein when one end of theband 12 is bent to overlap with the other end of the band.

More particularly, as depicted in FIG. 10, which illustrates a side viewof the flexible attachable article 10, and FIG. 11, which illustrates abottom view of the article 10, the grooves 320 (or notches) may beformed in a side of a portion of the band 12 that extends below theflexible electronic display 18. The grooves or notches 320 illustratedherein may also be formed in the transverse edges of the bottom portionof the band 12 and may extend from one end of the band 12 to the otherend of the band 12 or may extend along only a portion of the band 12 andneed not extend from end to end. As illustrated in FIG. 11, there may bea gap or a space 333 between the outer or transverse edges of thegrooves or notches 320 and the outer or transverse edges of the rest ofthe band 12 or the flexible electronic display 18. In other words, theouter edges of the grooves 320 may be positioned inwardly of thegreatest transverse edges of the band 12 or the display 18. In otherembodiments, this gap can be reduced or eliminated (i.e., the edges ofthe grooves 320 can be commensurate with the transverse edges of theband 12) or this gap can be increased. In further embodiments, thegrooves 320 can extend outward of the transverse edges of the support16, in which case the grooves 320 can engage and connect with acomplementary structure disposed on an interior of the electronicsmodule 19 or another portion of the band 12. In still a furtherembodiment, the grooves 320 can, alternatively or additionally, beformed in the bottom side of the band 12. As briefly noted above, inother embodiments, the grooves 320 can be formed in the bottom sidealong the entire length of the support 16 or along only a partial lengthof the support 16. For example, the grooves 320 may only be formed inthe bottom side of the support 16 near or at the end portions of theband 12. As also illustrated in FIGS. 10-12, the grooves or notches 320each have a generally triangular shape, but, in other examples, thegrooves 320 can be differently shaped grooves or notches (e.g., they canbe rectangular, semi-circular, etc.)

As illustrated in FIGS. 9 and 10, the electronics module 19 may includefirst and second opposing sidewalls 328A and 328B that border and extendabove (at least with reference to FIG. 9) the band portion 12. A firstset of inwardly facing projections 324A is formed or defined by thefirst sidewall 328A, while a second set of inwardly facing projections324B is formed or defined by the second sidewall 328B. As illustrated inFIG. 9, the projections 324A and the projections 324B are aligned withand extend inward toward one another. When, however, the gap 333 betweenthe edges of the grooves 320 and the edges of the band 12 is decreased,the projections 324A and 324B can be modified so as not to extend quiteas far inwardly. On the other hand, when the gap 333 is increased, theprojections 324A and 324B can be modified so as to extend furtherinwardly. In any event, the projections 324A and 324B are configured toaccept or mate with the grooves or notches 320 when one end of the band12 is disposed so that the lower portion of the band 12 including thegrooves 320 is disposed in the space between the projections 324A and324B. As such, the projections 324A and 324 are spaced apart a distancethat is the same as or slightly larger than the distance betweencorresponding grooves 320 on either side of the band 12. In some cases,the distance between the projections 324A and 324B may be slightlysmaller than the distance between the corresponding groove 320 on eitherside of the band 12, in which case the material forming the grooves 320may be flexible or compressible.

When the flexible band 12 is bent to be disposed on or around an object(e.g., a wrist, an arm, etc.), such that one of the ends 14 is disposedon or near an upper side of the other one of the ends 14, a portion ofthe device 10 (e.g., one of the ends 14) can be disposed or seated in areceiving area 332 (FIG. 9) defined by the bottom of the electronicsmodule 19 at the other end 14, the receiving area 332 including theprojections 324, and the sidewalls 328A and 328B. In this manner, asillustrated in FIG. 12, one or more of the grooves 320 will be disposedor seated in the receiving area 332 between one or more of theprojections 324A and 324B, such that one or more of the projections 324Aand 324B, which extend inwardly, engage and serve to mate with andretain respective ends of the grooves 320. As such, a mechanicalconnection may be formed between one or more of the grooves 320 and oneor more respective projections 324A and 324B. At the same time, themagnets 22A, 22B, 24A, and 24B, if present, by virtue of being inproximity to one another, create or provide a magnetic force that alsoserves to help hold the ends 14 together. So configured, the end pieces14 are mechanically and magnetically connectable in various differentpositions with respect to one another, such as that illustrated in FIG.12, when the device 10 is bent or curved to be placed around a wrist, aleg, a bicycle handle bar, etc., for example. As a result, theattachable device 10 may be easily adjustable in size to fit variousdifferently-sized mounting members or wrists while still providing for astrong connectivity between the ends 14 of the band 12. As one ofordinary skill in the art will appreciate, the grooves 320 disposed orseated in the receiving area 332 can be repositioned, relative to theprojections 324A and 324B, to adjust the attachable device 10 to fit adifferently sized mounting members (e.g., different sized wrists). Itwill be understood that, while the band construction and claspingconcepts discussed with respect to FIGS. 1-12 are provided in thecontext of specific examples, any of these concepts or techniques can beapplied to any of the other embodiments described herein in anycombination.

Importantly, it is desirable to maximize the amount of the electronicdisplay 18 that is continuously viewable to a user when, for example,the user has the band device 10 mounted on the user's wrist. To do so,the device 10 may be configured to cause the connection between and/orthe overlap of the ends 14 of the band 12 to fall in a region that isnear or adjacent to the outer side or edge of the user's wrist (i.e.,the edge of the user's wrist that is on the side of the hand at whichthe pinky finger is located). Generally speaking, when the band 12 isdisposed around a user's wrist, the flexible electronics display 18forms a continuous display around the wrist from one end to the otherend (when the ends 14 of the band 12 attach end-to-end) or from one endto a position at which one side of the band begins to overlap the otherside of band (when the ends 14 of the band 12 overlap). It is desirableto place the discontinuity in the flexible electronics display 18 at theouter side of the user's wrist so that the flexible electronic display18 is continuous through the portions of the band disposed near the topof the wrist, the inner side of the wrist and the bottom of the wrist(i.e., so that the discontinuity of the electronic display 18 caused bythe connection of the ends of the band or the overlap of the ends ofband falls at a position adjacent to the outer wrist of the user). Whenconfigured in this manner, the user may view a continuous display, i.e.,one without a discontinuity caused by the ends of the band, as the userlooks at the band at the top of his or her wrist (i.e., when the user'spalm is facing downwardly), and as the user turns his or her wrist overto cause the user's palm to face upwardly. During this motion, the userviews the display adjacent the top of the user's wrist, the displayadjacent the inside of the user's wrist (on the index finger side of thehand), and the display adjacent the bottom of the user's wrist (on thesame side of the wrist as the user's palm). As this is a natural rangeof motion of the user's wrist, it is desirable to provide a continuousdisplay to the user during this motion.

To provide this maximal continuous usable display to the user, thedevice 10 may be configured to have a fixed position of the band that isto be placed adjacent to a fixed position of a user's wrist, such as onthe top of the user's wrist. In this case, the ends of the band aresized or spaced from this fixed position to overlap or connect at aposition that will end up being adjacent to the user's outer wrist whenthe band is disposed on or wrapped around the user's wrist. The outerwrist or outside of the wrist, in this case, may be defined by anyposition that is substantially within a particular quarter of thecircumference of a circle, oval, or ellipse defined around a user'swrist, with the particular quarter being centered at the middle of theouter side of the user's wrist.

FIGS. 13-17 illustrate one embodiment of the band device 10 whichprovides for a maximal continuous usable display surface by assuringthat the discontinuity in the electronic display falls at a positionadjacent to the user's outer wrist. In particular, the device 10illustrated in FIGS. 13A-C includes a band 12 extending between two endpieces 14A and 14B which may be metal, plastic or other material thatprovides a pleasing look. An electronics module 19 having an exteriorcasing or cover is disposed on the band 12 at a position between the twoend pieces 14A and 14B, but is not centered between the two end pieces14A and 14B. In particular, the electronics module 19 is disposed closerto one end piece 14B than the other end piece 14A. FIG. 13C illustratesa top view of the device 10 showing a continuous flexible electronicdisplay 18 extending between the two end pieces 14 a and 14B. In thisconfiguration, the end pieces 14A and 14B form at least a portion of aclasp or clasping mechanism that is similar in nature to that describedwith respect to FIGS. 9-12. As such, and as illustrated in FIG. 13A(depicting a bottom view of the device 10), notches or grooves 320 areformed into the transverse edges of a lower portion of the band 12 andthese notches or grooves 320 are received in a mating structure 332formed in one of the end pieces 14B (as illustrated in FIG. 13C).

In this case, the electronics module 19 (or the cover associated withthat module) acts as a reference mark or reference location that is tobe placed at a particular position on a user's wrist, in this case, onthe top of a user's wrist. When so placed, the sections of the band 12extending out from the module 19 are sized to overlap at a positionadjacent to the outer side of the wrist of the user. FIGS. 14A and 14Billustrate the band device 10 of FIGS. 13A-C flexed to overlap, with theconnection structure on the end 14B being used to hold or attach theends together. Here, as illustrated by a user's wrist in dotted reliefin FIG. 14B, the ends of the band 12 overlap or come together on theouter side of the user's wrist. As such, the flexible electronic display18 forms a continuous display from the top of the wrist, through theinner side of the wrist to the bottom of the wrist as illustrated by thearrow in FIG. 14A. This continuous usable display enables a user to viewa long continuous screen or multiple serial display screens disposednext to one another on the display 18 without there being anydiscontinuity in the display of these screens, as the user turns his orher wrist between a palm up and a palm down position or vice versa.While the illustration of FIGS. 14A and 14B depict the band device 10 ona right wrist of a user, the band device 10 could be similarly placed onthe left wrist with the module 19 still adjacent to the top of the wristand the ends of the band 12 overlapping on the outer side of the wrist.

FIG. 15 illustrates in more detail the manner in which the end pieces14A and 14B operate to enable the opposite ends of side of the band 12to be coupled together. In particular, as illustrated in FIG. 15, thelower end clasp 14B includes a receiving area 332 and notches or grooves324A and 324B (as described with respect to FIG. 9) to accept a portionof the band 12 from the other end 14A of the band 12 therein. Here, thenotice 320 in the band 12 or in the end piece 14A may interact with orfit into the notches 324A and 324B of the end piece 14B to provide africtional force that holds the ends of the band 12 from movinglaterally with respect to one another. Of course, the size or innercircumference of the device 10 can be adjusted by using different onesof the notches 320 on the band near the end 14A. Additionally, asdescribed in earlier embodiments, magnets (not shown in FIGS. 13-15) maybe disposed in the end pieces 14A and/or 14B and/or in the ends of theband 12 adjacent to the end pieces 14A and/or 14B to enable or provide amagnetic connection between the ends of the band 12 when the oppositeends 14A and 14B of the band 12 are disposed in an overlapping manner.The magnets may provide an attractive force between the ends of the band12 to help prevent the ends of the band 12 from moving away from oneanother in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 15.

FIGS. 16A-16C illustrate the device 10 of FIGS. 13-15 disposed in threedifferent overlapping band positions to illustrate that this device 10can take on or be adjusted to various different sizes while stillproviding a flexible electronic display 18 with maximal continuoususable surface area. In this case, the band 12 is approximately 246 mmlong, when laid out flat. As will be noted, by coupling the ends 14A and14B of the band 12 together at different locations, the band device 10can take on different sizes which may accommodate different sizedwrists. For example, in each of the configurations of FIGS. 16A-16C, theinner side of the band device 10 generally forms an oval with differentdimensions. In this example case, the smaller band device configurationof FIG. 16A includes a smaller dimension of 35.5 mm (measured from theelectronics module 19 across to the band 12) and a larger dimension of62 mm (from one inner side of the band device 10 to the other inner sideof the band device 10). In similar manners, the medium sized band deviceconfiguration of FIG. 16B includes a smaller dimension of 41.5 mm and alarger dimension of 69 mm while the large sized band deviceconfiguration of FIG. 16C includes a smaller dimension of 45 mm and alarger dimension of 73 mm. In each of these cases, the discontinuity Din the band device 10 (illustrated as the point at which the end 14A ofthe band begins to overlap the portion of the band below it) is disposedadjacent to the side of the user's wrist and, in particular, the outerside of the user's wrist (as shown in FIG. 14B). Moreover, as can beseen, the band 12 could be adjusted further to be smaller or larger insize and, in most cases the discontinuity D in the band will lieadjacent to the outer side of the wrist.

For the sake of completeness, FIG. 17 illustrates the back of the device10 of FIGS. 13-16 when the band 12 of the device 10 is laid out flat orstraight. As can be easily seen in FIG. 17, the electronics module 19sticks up (or down) from the surface of the band 12 and thus provides atactile sensation to the user when the user wears the band. Thisfeature, in turn, makes using the module 19 as the reference point forthe user when placing the band on the user's wrist more natural, as theuser can feel the presence of the module 19 in the correct location onthe top (or bottom) of his or her wrist, and thus will know that theband is properly aligned on the wrist to provide for a maximalcontinuous usable display surface in the manner described above. Stillfurther, as illustrated in FIG. 17, the electronics module 19 may have asingle or multiple contact points 349 that may be used to charge abattery (not shown) disposed within the electronics module 19, or toprovide other communications between the electronics module 19 andanother device such as a base station or a base unit.

FIG. 18 illustrates the embodiment of FIGS. 9-12 in more detail toillustrate another example of a band device 10 configured to have amaximal continuous usable display surface by having the clasping oroverlapping portions of the band 12 disposed adjacent a side of a user'swrist, such as the outer side of the user's wrist. In this case, theelectronics module 19 is disposed on one end of the band 12, but stilloperates as a reference member or point that is to be located as aparticular position on the user's wrist, such as on the top or thebottom of the user's wrist. As illustrated in FIG. 18, when so located,the ends of the band 12 overlap to create a discontinuity D on the sideof the device 10 that is adjacent to the outer (or inner) side of theuser's wrist. Moreover, further adjustment of the band 12 in theembodiment of FIG. 18 to make the band 12 configured to be smaller willstill place the overlapping ends of the band 12 and thus thediscontinuity D of the band device 10 on a side of the user's wrist.

In another embodiment illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20, the flexibleattachable article 10 is similar to the article 10 described above inconnection with FIGS. 9-12. In this embodiment, however, the article 10includes a mechanical connector 350 instead of the mechanical connectors320 and 324 described above in connection with FIGS. 9-12. Asillustrated in FIG. 19, the mechanical connector 350 is or takes theform of a clasping structure. The clasp 350 has a flexible body 354 thathas an oval-shaped cross-section and two opposing end portions 358A and358B spaced apart from but closely adjacent to one another.

When the flexible band 12 of the device 10 is bent to be disposed on oraround an object (e.g., a wrist), and after portions of the device 10are magnetically connected to one another (e.g., via the magnets 22A,22B, 24A, and 24B not shown), the clasp 350 can be installed on thedevice 10 to mechanically connect two overlapping portions of the device10, as illustrated in FIG. 20. Specifically, the flexible body 354 ofthe clasp 350 can be manipulated such that the clasp 350 can be slid orpositioned over the two overlapping portions of the article 10. Forexample, the opposing end portions 358 of the clasp 350 can be pulledapart from one another, after which the clasp 350 can be slid orpositioned over the two overlapping portions of the band 12. The clasp350 can, in some cases, be positioned over one or both overlapping ends14 (e.g., proximate to the magnets 22A, 22B, 24A, 24B), while, in othercases, the clasp 350 can be positioned over other overlapping portionsof the band 12. In any event, because the body 354 is flexible, the body354 can be restored to its original shape after being manipulated andpositioned over the two overlapping portions of the device 10. The clasp350 can be retained in the installed position by virtue of the shape ofthe body 354 and the thickness of the overlapping portions of the device10.

Of course, the clasp 350 can be constructed differently and yet stillperform the intended function. In other embodiments, the clasp 350 canhave a differently-shaped body 354. The body 354 can, for example, havemore of a circular shape, more of a rectangular shape, or have some sortof other suitable shape. In other embodiments, the body 354 can beformed of two or more discrete sections that can be removably coupled toone another to facilitate the installation or removal of the clasp 350.These sections could, for example, be snapped or hooked to one another.Depending on the construction of the clasp 350, the clasp 350 can, inother embodiments, also be installed differently and yet still performthe intended function. When, for example, the body 354 is formed of twoor more sections that can be removably coupled to one another (such asby being hinged), one or more of the sections could be removed from theother section(s) to allow the clasp 350 to be installed on the device10. Once the clasp 350 is positioned properly, the sections could beagain coupled together to install the clasp 350 thereon. In stillanother embodiment, the clasp 350 could be rigid or semi-rigid and forma member that encircles (partially or completely) one portion of theband 12 and that slides over the other end portion of the band 12 whenthe band 12 is folded over on itself as illustrated in FIG. 20.

However, as further illustrated in FIG. 20, the device 10 is configuredto provide maximal continuous usable display surface to a user wearingthe device 10 as the discontinuity D in the display 18 occurs at theside of the device (i.e., adjacent a side, such as the outer side, of auser's wrist when worn on the wrist). Here again, the electronics module19 may act as the reference point that is disposed adjacent a particularpart of the user's wrist, such as the top of the wrist, so that thediscontinuity D in the electronic display 18 which now occurs at or nearthe clasp 350 is disposed at a point adjacent to the side of the user'swrist. In this embodiment, as in the embodiment illustrated in FIGS.9-12, the electronics module 19 is the reference point and is alsodisposed at one end of the band 12.

In another embodiment illustrated in FIGS. 21-24, the flexibleattachable article 10, again illustrated in the form of a wristband,includes a similar band portion 12 and ends 14A and 14B. However, inthis embodiment, the article 10 has a connection structure that includesthe magnets 22A, 22B, 24A, and 24B described above, but also includes abuckle clasp 380 that can effectuate a mechanical connection between theends 14A and 14B, such that the ends 14A and 14B can be mechanically andmagnetically connected to one another when the device 10 is bent, asillustrated in FIG. 24, to form a circular or oval band with the display18 on the outside of the band 12 while also providing maximal continuoususable display surface to a user. As illustrated in FIG. 21, the buckleclasp 380 is connected to the end 14A (although it can be connected tothe end 14B in other embodiments) and has a frame 384. The frame 384includes a first frame portion 386A, a second frame portion 386B, and apair of sides 388 that each connect the first frame portion 386A and thesecond frame portion 386B. The buckle clasp 380 further includes anopening 390 defined between the first and second frame portions 386A,386B. As depicted in FIG. 22 (which illustrates a partial side view ofthe band 12), the article 10 in this embodiment includes a plurality ofgrooves or notches 392 defined in the end of each of the opposing sides394 of the article 10 which may cooperate with similar grooved structureon the inside surfaces of the sides 388 of the frame 384.

When the flexible band 12 is bent to be disposed on or around an object(e.g., a wrist), the end 14B can be inserted or fed through the opening390 in the buckle clasp 380, as shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, andmanipulated (e.g., pushed, pulled, etc.) to the desired position (whichis based on the desired size of the article 10 and the size of thewrist, for example). In turn, the buckle clasp 380 and the magnets 22A,22B, 24A, and 24B serve to connect the ends 14A and 14B in the desiredposition while mechanical interactions between the frame portions 386Aand 386B and the upper and lower sides of the band 12, as well asmechanical interactions between the sides 388 and the sides 394 of theband 12 limit movement of the band 12 in the lateral direction.Specifically, the first frame portion 386A applies a resistive force ona top or upper side of the device 10, which prevents movement of theends 14A and 14B relative to one another. In addition, as depicted inFIG. 23, an interior portion of each of the sides 388 (which may begrooved or otherwise provided with a rough surface treatment) engages orcontacts a respective plurality of corresponding grooves or notches 392,which also serves to prevent movement of the ends 14A and 14B relativeto one another. At the same time, the magnets 22A, 22B, 24A, and 24B, byvirtue of being in proximity to one another, create or provide amagnetic force that also serves to hold the ends 14A and 14B together.In this manner, the ends 14A and 14B can be both mechanically andmagnetically connected to one another when the device 10 is disposed onor around the desired object, as shown in FIG. 24.

In the embodiment of FIG. 24, the electronics module 19 is illustratedas being on the bottom of the device 10 when the ends 14A and 14B areconnected and, in this case, the electronics module 19 may be areference point or reference element that is to be located near oradjacent the bottom of the user's wrist so as to provide thediscontinuity in the electronics display 18 on the outer side of theuser's wrist, as illustrated in FIG. 24.

Each of the embodiments of FIGS. 9-24 use the electronics module 19 or aportion thereof, such as the casing or cover of the electronics module19, as a reference element which is to be placed at or adjacent to aparticular point on a user's wrist, such as on the top or bottom of theuser's wrist, so that the discontinuity in the electronic display 18(e.g., where the ends of the band 12 meet or begin to overlap) is on oneof the sides of the user's wrist, and preferably is on or adjacent tothe outer side of the user's wrist. However, other things could be usedas the reference element instead or as well. For example, the referenceelement could be any rigid element (e.g., other than the electronicsmodule 19) such as a rigid bar or a point on the band 12 to be disposedat a particular location on the user's wrist. Alternatively, thereference element could be a printed, etched, or other non-rigid memberor indication on the band 12 indicating the location of the band 12 thatis to be placed on or adjacent to a particular point of the user'swrist, such as the top of the wrist or the bottom of the wrist or evenone of the sides of the user's wrist. The reference element couldadditionally or alternatively be a weighted element that has, forexample, more weight per unit volume than the other components of theband device 10. The reference element could be a surface treatment, suchas a particular rough surface, a point, a line that is distinguishableby touch or sight (e.g., a ridge extending across the band 12 in thetransverse direction), etc. The reference element could be disposed onthe bottom of the band 12 so that it is viewable and/or able to be felt(e.g., by the wrist) from the underside of the band 12 or could belocated on the top of the band 12, one or more of the sides of the band12, or the edges of the band 12, or any combination thereof and beviewable or able to be felt by the user. If desired, the referenceelement could be displayed on the flexible electronic display 18 at aparticular point on the display instead of being located on or printedon the band (in which case the reference element is still coupled to theband 12). Moreover, the reference element could stick out from the upperor lower surface of the band 12 to be able to be seen or felt better orcould be an indentation or reduced surface or void disposed within theband 12. As examples, the reference element could be a harder point onthe band 12 that can be felt by the user when, for example, placing theband 12 on a wrist, but could otherwise not be viewable ordistinguishable by sight. To the contrary, the reference element couldbe visible by sight but not be distinguishable by touch. Moreover, thereference element may be located at a point or position on the band 12that is to be adjacent to any part of the wrist, such as the top of thewrist, the bottom of the wrist, the inner side of the wrist or even theouter side of the wrist.

Moreover, while the embodiments having maximal continuous useabledisplay surface features as described herein are generally describedusing an adjustable band with overlapping ends, the same principlescould be used on a non-adjustable (in length) band having an end-to-endconnection mechanism, such as that described with respect to FIGS. 1 and2, and 8A and 8B. In this case, the end-to-end connection will belocated at a position disposed adjacent to the outer (or possibly inner)side of the user's wrist.

In other embodiments, the connection structure can include any of theabove-described mechanical connectors in combination with a differentconfiguration of magnets. For example, the connection structure caninclude the clasp 350 in combination with the magnetic materials 20A and20B described in connection with FIGS. 1 and 2. Moreover, in otherembodiments, the connection structure can utilize one or more of theabove-described mechanical connectors and/or other mechanical connectorsin combination. For example, the connection structure couldalternatively include the recess 300 and the tab 304 as well as theclasp 350. Such a connection structure would provide an even strongerand more durable connection between the end pieces 14 of the device 10.In further alternative embodiments, different mechanical connectors,other than those described above can be used. For example, theconnection structure can include a recess formed on a top or bottom sideof one of the clasps 14 and a cooperating tab that extends upward fromone of the clasps 14 and can be inserted into the recess.

It may be important to limit in the manner in which the flexible support16 can bend or flex so as to protect the flexible display 18 and/or thetouch screen interface 26 of FIGS. 1-24, as well as to provide orprotect the edges of those devices, which might be subject to impact ifthe dynamically flexible article or device 10 is hit from a lateralside. FIG. 25A illustrates a top view of the flexible support 16,showing the flexible display 18 disposed thereon. In this case, theflexible display 18 is disposed on top of the flexible support 16 overthe center portion of the support 16, while the edges of the support 16extend out transversely towards the sides of the device 10 beyond theflexible display 18 at least a little bit. This additional area ofmaterial of the support 16 may be used to protect the flexible display18 from being bent or torn in the case of a side impact to the device10, as this material will operate to blunt or absorb some of thatimpact. As illustrated in FIG. 25B, which provides a cross-sectionalview of the device 10 of FIG. 25A, the flexible support 16 can bethicker in the area at the edges of the device 10 and may extend upwardto be even with or disposed above the lateral or transverse sides of theflexible display 18, to provide additional side impact protection forthe flexible display 18. In this case, as illustrated in FIG. 25B, thedisplay 18 is seated in a space or crevice formed within the center ofthe support 16, wherein the support 16 has sidewalls that extend aboveor up against the edges of the flexible display 18, in order to provideside impact protection to the display 18. In some cases, the edge orsidewalls of the support 16 that extend upward to protect the edges ofthe flexible display 18 and/or the touch screen interface 26 (ifpresent) may be formed with stitching when the support 16 is made ofleather for example. In another embodiment, illustrated in FIG. 26,additional side impact protection is provided by a wire or other harder,rigid or semi-rigid material 60 (having a density greater than that ofthe flexible support material 16, but that is still flexible) disposedwithin or along the flexible support 16 along the edges of the flexibledisplay 18 near or adjacent to the sides of the flexible display 18. Asillustrated in FIG. 26, the wires 60 are provided within the flexiblesupport material 16 and extend along the edge of the band portion 12next to or adjacent the transverse sides of the flexible display 18 toprovide superior support or edge protection for the display 18 in thecase of a side impact to the device 10. Of course, other types of edgeprotections besides those illustrated in FIGS. 25 and 26 can be used toprotect the edges of the of the flexible display 18. Here, thetransverse sides are the sides extending in the lateral directionbetween the lateral ends of the display 18.

FIGS. 27-44 illustrate structures that can be used to protect theflexible display 18 and the touch screen interface 26 (if it exists) bylimiting the certain flexing, bending and/or torsional movement of theflexible support 16, and thus the display 18 disposed thereon, tocertain predefined bending motions or ranges. In particular, because theflexible display 18 is formed as a set of separate substrates havingdifferent electronic components formed or etched thereon, as will bedescribed herein, certain types of movement or bending motions may causedamage to the flexible display 18 by causing these layers to delaminateor come apart from one another. In particular, while it is generallypossible to flex or bend the band portion 12 in one direction (e.g.around a wrist to form a circular band such as that shown in FIGS. 2 and4) without delaminating the separate layers of the flexible display 18,it is typically not generally desirable or possible to be able to flexor bend the display 18 in the opposite direction or in multipledifferent directions, such as forming a circular band with the flexibledisplay 18 facing the inside of the band, as doing may cause the layersof the flexible display to delaminate from one other and thus stopfunctioning.

More particularly, while it is desirable to bend the flexible support16, as illustrated in FIGS. 2 and 4, such that the display 18 facestowards the outside of a circular ring (i.e., wherein the displaysurface of the flexible electronic display through which the imagecontent is viewable is bent to be convex and the surface of the flexibleelectronic display disposed near or adjacent the support structure isbent to be concave), it would be disadvantageous and potentiallydestructive to the flexible display 18 to bend the device 10 to far inthe opposite manner (referred to herein as a counter-rotationaldirection), i.e., with the display 18 on the inside of the ring (whereinthe display surface of the flexible electronic display through which theimage content is viewable is bent to be concave and the surface of theflexible electronic display disposed near or adjacent the supportstructure is bent to be convex). In particular, bending in thecounter-rotational direction would or could potentially delaminate thevarious layers of the flexible display 18 from one another. Stillfurther, it would be undesirable to provide too much flexing of thesides of the flexible display 18 around the longitudinal axis of theband 12 or too much torsional bending on the flexible display 18,wherein such torsional bending rotates one of the ends 14 around thelongitudinal center line of the band 12 with respect to the other of theends 14, thus forming a helical structure in the band 12. In this case,torsional rotation would occur when one end of the flexible display 18is rotated in one direction while the other end of the flexible display18 is rotated in the other direction, such as by rotating one of the endpieces 14 about the center longitudinal axis of the band 12 in aclockwise direction while simultaneously rotating the other end piece 14about the center longitudinal axis of the band 12 in a counterclockwisedirection (from the same viewpoint) simultaneously. Again, as will beunderstood, too much of such a bending movement could delaminate theflexible display 18 and/or otherwise damage the flexible display 18.

FIGS. 27-44 illustrate various mechanisms for limiting the bending orflexing motion of the flexible support 16 of the device 10 to thedesired bending motions like those illustrated in FIGS. 2, 4, 7A, 8B,12, 14, etc., while limiting undesirable bending motion such as, forexample, longitudinal flexing and torsional or counter-rotationalflexing of the display 18. In particular, these or other mechanicalstructures can be used to limit the bending motion of the flexiblesubstrate to a minimal radius of curvature (e.g., in the rotationaldirection, such as when the display surface of the flexible electronicdisplay through which the image content is viewable is bent to beconcave and the surface of the flexible electronic display disposed nearor adjacent the support structure or flexible band is bent to be convex)to be greater than or equal to the minimum critical bending radius ofthe flexible electronic display. Here, the minimum critical bendingradius of the flexible electronic display is the minimal or smallestbending radius at which further bending will impair or destroy thefunctionality of the flexible electronic display by, for example,breaking the electronic connections or other components in the flexibleelectronic display. Such a minimal critical bending radius may bedefined by a single bend or by multiple repeated bends.

As shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B the support 16 can include a series ofspacers or bars 70 disposed between sections of the band portion 12 fromone side of the band 12 to another side of the band 12 (i.e., orientedtransversely) across the band portion 12. The spacers 70 operate tolimit or reduce the amount of torsional rotation that is able to beapplied to the substrate 16 and also limit the amount of longitudinalrotation that can be applied to the band 12. More specifically, thematerial, size, number, and/or spacing of the spacers 70 within theflexible support 16 may be varied to define, and thus limit, the amountof torsional motion that can be applied to the support 16. To this end,the spacers 70 can be made of a material, such as a rigid or semi-rigidmaterial like hard plastic or metal, that is stiffer or more inflexiblethan the material from which the band 12 is made. In other embodiments,the spacers 70 and the support 16 can be made of the same material, butthe spacers 70 may comprise a thicker or denser configuration of thatmaterial. In yet other embodiments, the support 16 may be made of abendable metal that bends easily at large radii of curvatures (i.e.,small bending angles) but that increases in stiffness or non-elasticityat smaller radii of curvatures (i.e., larger bending angles). Thespacers 70 may be separately formed and then disposed within or on thesupport 16 or may be manufactured as part of the support 16. Forexample, the spacers 70 can be molded on the underside of the bandportion 12. In FIG. 27A, the spacers 70 are evenly spaced across theband portion 12, such that all portions of the band portion 12 aresubject to the same bending or flexing limit. Alternatively, one or moreof the spacers 70 can be spaced at different distances from one anotheracross the band portion 12. In FIG. 27B, the spacers 70 are spaced atdifferent distances across the band portion 12 (i.e., d2 is greater thand1), such that different portions of the device 10 (e.g., the sides) canbe bent or flexed more than other portions of the device 10 (e.g., thetop and the bottom). The spacers 70 may also operate to absorb sideimpacts to the band 12. For example, the support 16 can have a widththat is at least slightly larger than the width of the flexible display18, such that the spacers 70 also act as side impact protectionstructure.

In FIGS. 28-29, the support 16 and the flexible display 18 areintegrally formed with one another. As illustrated in FIG. 28, aplurality of grooves 67 are formed (e.g., molded) in an underside of thesupport 16 of the band 12 from one side of the band 12 to another sideof the band 12 (i.e., oriented transversely) across the band portion 12.As illustrated in FIG. 28, each groove 67 extends through only a portionof the thickness of the support 16, such that the support 16 includes acontinuous bottom layer of material 65 immediately adjacent an undersideof the flexible display 18 and a plurality of sections or islands 66that jut or extend upward from the bottom layer 65 adjacent respectivegrooves 67. The grooves 67 illustrated herein each have a U-shape, butcan, in other embodiments, have a different shape (e.g., a rectangularshape, a triangular shape, can be more curved, can be flatter, etc.) Sodefined, each groove 67 forms a sort of “living hinge” that operates tocontrol (e.g., limit or reduce) the amount of bending between thesections 66 of the support 16 that are adjacent to that groove 67. FIG.29 illustrates how the grooves 67 can, when the band 12 is being bent,operate to control the amount of bending between the sections 66 of thesupport 16, and, in turn, control the amount of bending applied to thedisplay 18. Because the grooves 67 are evenly spaced apart across theband portion 12, all of the sections 66 of the support 16 are subject tothe same bending or flexing limit. The material forming the bottom layerof material 65 and the material forming the islands 66 may be made ofthe same or different material and each may be made of eithercompressible (such as foam, rubber, etc.) or non-compressible materials(such as hard plastic, metal, etc.) In fact, both of the layers 65 and66 may be made of non-compressible materials, one of the layers 65 and66 may be made of a compressible material while the other layer may bemade of a non-compressible material, or the layers 65 and 66 may be bothmade of compressible materials with the same or differentcompressibility. Of course, the spacing between the various groove 67can vary to provide for more or less flexing of the support 16.Moreover, for the sake of illustration, the embodiment of FIGS. 13-17may include the living hinge material or support illustrated in FIGS. 28and 29 to limit the bending motion thereof as well as to provide for asoft feel or touch to the user.

As with the spacers 70, the size, number, spacing and/or compressibilityof the material forming the grooves 67 may be varied to define, and thuslimit, the amount of torsional or other bending motion that can beapplied to the support 16. For example, while the grooves 67 shown inFIG. 28 only extend through a portion of the support 16, the grooves 67can, in other embodiments, may extend through more or less of (deeper orless deep into) the support 16, which would, in turn, affect the degreeof curvature permitted by the grooves 67. As noted above, the grooves 67illustrated in FIGS. 28-29 are evenly spaced across the band portion 12,such that all portions of the band 12 are subject to the same bending orflexing limit.

Alternatively, however, one or more of the grooves 67 can be spaced atdifferent distances across the band 12, with the effect that differentportions of the device 10 (e.g., the sides) can be bent or flexed morethan other portions of the device 10 (e.g., the top and the bottom orone side versus the other side of the band). For example, in anembodiment illustrated in FIGS. 32 and 33, the grooves 67 are spaced atdifferent distances across the longitudinal span of the band 12. Asillustrated in FIG. 32, the distance between the grooves 67 near or atthe end 14A is greater than the distance between the grooves 67 near orat a middle portion of the band 12, and the distance between the grooves67 near or at the end 14B is greater than the distance between thegrooves 67 near or at the middle portion. As illustrated in FIG. 33,different portions of the device 10 can thus be bent or flexed more thanother portions of the device 10. Specifically, the portion of the band12 labeled B, by virtue of having grooves 67 that are spaced closer toone another, can be bent or flexed more than the portion of the bandlabeled A and the portion of the band 12 labeled C, which have grooves67 that are further apart. Moreover, the width of the grooves 67 can bevaried to provide more or less flexing in the band at particularlocations.

In some cases, a user of the device 10 may find it necessary (e.g., forviewing the display 18) to bend the band 12. A user of the device may,for example, find it necessary to apply a small amount of torsionalrotation to portions of the flexible display 18 and/or flex the side ofthe flexible display 18 around the longitudinal axis of the band 12.Such motion may be necessary when, for example, the device 10 isdisposed along an arm of the user, as illustrated in FIG. 30. To permitsuch operations, but at the same time prevent bending that may comprisethe effectiveness or even destroy the flexible display 18, the article10 can include one or more transverse grooves or spacers formed ordisposed in the support 16.

In FIG. 34, for example, the article 10 includes a plurality oflongitudinal grooves 69 formed in the support 16 between the ends 14 andalong the longitudinal axis of the band 12. The grooves 69 can thus beoriented perpendicular to the grooves 67 described in FIGS. 28-29. Thegrooves 69, like the grooves 67, operate to permit a desired maximumamount of flexing and torsional rotation of the display 18. The grooves69, however, permit a desired amount of flexing and torsional rotationin a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the band 12.

As with the transverse grooves 320, the size, width, number, and/orspacing of the longitudinal grooves 69 may be varied to adjust thismaximum amount, limit flexing or rotation at certain points along thedisplay 18, and/or facilitate flexing or rotation at certain pointsalong the display 18. For example, the grooves 69 can be larger (e.g.,wider) than what is illustrated in FIG. 34, can be formed in only aportion of the support 16, or can be more numerous (e.g., there can be agroove 69 between each of the transverse grooves) than what isillustrated in FIG. 28. Likewise, the grooves 69 can be spaced and/orpositioned differently. As an example, the grooves 69 can be disposedcloser to the edges of the band 12 (i.e., not on the longitudinal axisof the band 12). Of course, if desired, one or more of the spacers 70discussed above in connection with FIGS. 27A and 27B can be disposed ina longitudinal direction (i.e., along the longitudinal axis of the band12) in the support 16. These grooves can also be equally spaced or thesame size, or may vary as they get farther from the longitudinal centerof the band to allow more or less torsional bending at different pointsalong the width of the band 12.

Still further, while the functioning and configuration of a band and theroutines performed on the band have been described with respect to awrist band that is longer than it is wide, when laid flat, the samestructure and techniques can be used for other types of bands, such asarm bands. FIG. 31, for example, illustrates an arm band 99 in which thedisplay 18 wraps around a larger part of a user's arm, as opposed tojust the wrist. In this case, the band 100 may be wider (along thetransverse direction) than it is long (along the longitudinal or lateraldirection) when laid flat. However, in this case, the display 18 and theelectronics module 19 may be configured in any of the manners describedabove. In particular, the band 99 can be configured to have a referencepoint, such as the electronics module 19, disposed adjacent to the topof a user's wrist while having the discontinuity in the display 18 occurat a point adjacent to the outer side of the user's wrist, asillustrated in FIG. 31. Of course, any of the methods or structuresdescribed above may be used to provide a connection between the ends ofthe arm band 99 at the point at which the ends of the arm band 99overlap or meet.

There are of course other manners of limiting the counter rotationalbending motion of the band 12, i.e., a bending motion that would put theflexible display 18 on the inside of a circular band as opposed to theoutside of the circular band as illustrated in FIGS. 2 and 4. Forexample, a longitudinally spaced rigid or semi-rigid member can bedisposed in or on the flexible support 16 that operates to allow bendingmotion as illustrated in FIGS. 2 and 4 but to limit counter-rotationalbending movement to, for example, the minimal critical radius ofcurvature of the flexible electronic display. FIGS. 35-42 illustrate abending limiting member 71 configured as a set of interconnected slatsor bars rotatable with respect to one another around a pivot point 72.

In FIG. 35, the interconnected slats or bars have alternating flatmembers 74 and flat members 75 with wings or protrusions 73 on the edgesthereof, wherein the wings 73 are disposed above the adjacent flatmembers 74. The flat members 74 are pivotally connected to the flatmembers 75 so that the wings 73, when disposed above a flat member 74,prevent or at least limit rotation about the pivot point 72 in onedirection while allowing such rotation in the opposite direction.

Of course, if desired, the shape and/or curvature of the wings 73 can bevaried to permit more or less rotation about the pivot point 72. In somecases, it may be desirable to vary the shape and/or curvature of onlysome of the wings 73. For example, wings 73 that permit greater bendingcan be used at or along sections of the band 12 (e.g., the sectionsdisposed along the sides of the wrist) where more curvature isdesirable.

In some cases, the spacing between the pivot points 72 may be adjustedto control (e.g., adjust) the minimum radius of curvature at which theband 12 can be bent, and, in turn, provide a more comfortableoval-shaped band 12 when worn (in contrast to a less comfortablecircular-shaped band 12). As shown in FIG. 36, the spacing between thepivot points 72 can be different at different points along the band 12.In other words, the pivot points 72 in one section of the band 12 may bea distance of d1 apart from one another, while the pivot points 72 inanother section of the band 12 may be a distance of d2 apart from oneanother, d2 being greater or less than d1. For example, the spacingbetween pivot point 72A and 72B (S₁ in FIGS. 36 and 37) is less than thespacing between pivot point 72C and 72D (S₂ in FIGS. 36 and 37). Assuch, different sections of the band 12 (e.g., the sections disposedalong the sides of the wrist) can be bent or flexed more than otherportions of the band 12 (e.g., the sections disposed along the top andthe bottom of the wrist), thereby facilitating the formation of a moreoval-shaped band 12, as illustrated in FIG. 37.

As shown in FIG. 38, the interconnected bars 74 and 75 can be arched orcurved. As illustrated in FIG. 39, such a configuration serves toreduce, or even eliminate, the sharpness of the bending at the pivotpoints 72, thereby providing a more continuous shape when the band 12 isbent. In some cases, it may be desirable to arch the bars 74 and 75 sothat the local display bending radii at the pivot points 72 are equaland opposite when the band 12 is both flat and bent (e.g., disposedaround the wrist).

In some instances, it may be desirable to limit the number ofconfigurations that the device 10 can take on, such as, for example,cheap-looking configurations, configurations that provide a confusinguser experience, or configurations in which the device 10 is likely tobe damaged. To this end, one or more of the pivot points can beconnected together with or using an interconnecting wire. As shown inFIG. 40, the pivot points 72 are connected together with or using aninterconnecting wire 68. In some cases, several interconnecting wires 68may be needed to connect different groups of pivot points 72. Forexample, one wire 68 may be utilized to interconnect pivot points 72disposed along one side of the band 12, while another wire 68 may beutilized to interconnect pivot points 72 disposed along the oppositeside of the band 12. In any event, the interconnecting wire(s) 68serve(s) to synchronize the movement of the pivot points 72 that areconnected to one another, which, in turn, fixes the angle betweeninterconnected bars 74 and 75 for those pivot points 72 that areconnected together.

In FIG. 41, interconnected bars 74 and 75 are connected at pivot points72 and each includes a protrusion 76 that extends at least partiallyabove the pivot point 72. In this case, the protrusions of adjacent bars74 and 75 contact each other very soon (in response to minimal rotationabout the pivot point 72) when rotated in one direction, to therebylimit or prevent such rotation, and allow rotation in the oppositedirection. Moreover, the interconnected bars 74 and 75 may additionallyinclude protrusions 77 that extend below the pivot point 72 but that arespaced further apart and thus allow more rotation than the protrusions76. The protrusions 77 will thus enable the member 71 to bend in onedirection (i.e., the down direction in FIG. 41) more than in the otherdirection (i.e., the up direction in FIG. 41). However, the protrusions77 will still prevent bending or flexing at large angles of curvatureand the spacing and interaction of the protrusions 76 and 77 can beconfigured to limit the minimal bending radius of the support element 71to the greater than or equal to the minimum critical bending radius ofthe flexible electronic display 18 disposed on the support element 71,to thereby protect the flexible electronic display 18. In any event, thespacing and size of the protrusions 76 and 77 can be adjusted to obtainthe desired amount of flexing in each direction.

Still further, FIG. 42 illustrates a top view of a bending or flexinglimiting structure forming a flexible support, formed as a series oftransversely interconnected longitudinal members 78, each longitudinalmember made up of a set of longitudinally disposed links. Here, thevarious sets of rotatably interconnected links are rotatablyinterconnected by pivot members disposed along the dotted lines 79 ofFIG. 42. The various sets of links as illustrated in FIG. 42 may be usedas or may be part of the flexible support 16, and may operate to limitthe bending motion of the flexible support 16 in each of thelongitudinal, counter-rotational and torsional directions describedabove. Of course, the interconnected links illustrated in FIG. 42 couldadditionally have wing or protrusion structure such as that of FIGS. 35,36, 37, 40 and 41, or other structure that limits rotation of adjacentlinks about the transverse pivot points 79 interconnecting the links, toprovide superior bending or flexing limiting structure.

In any event, the configuration of the members 71 of FIGS. 35-42 allowor enable movement of the adjacent slats or flat members 74, 75 and 78with respect to one another in one direction, e.g., the down directionin FIGS. 36 and 36, limited to a particular minimum bending radius,while limiting the rotational movement of the slats or bars 74 and 75 inthe opposite direction, such as the up direction in FIGS. 35 and 36, tothe same or a different minimum bending radius. In this case, the member71 with the alternating flat members 74 and flat members 75 or theinterconnected support of FIG. 42 may be disposed along a longitudinalaxis or in the longitudinal direction of the support 16, as illustratedin FIG. 43, to allow the bending motion illustrated in FIGS. 2 and 4while limiting counter rotational bending motion. While only one member71 is illustrated in FIG. 43 as being disposed longitudinally in thecenter of the flexible support 16, more such members could be disposedat other locations along the length of the flat support 16, such as oneither or both lateral sides of the support 16. Moreover, while only onemember 71 is illustrated in FIG. 43, multiple such members could be usedto limit the counter-rotational movement of the flexible support 16. Ofcourse, if desired, a bending limiting member similar to that of FIGS.35 and 36 could be disposed along the edge of the flexible support 16instead of or in addition to the wire 60 of FIG. 25, so as to bothprotect the edge of the flexible display 18 (by providing a rigid orsemi-rigid structure at the edges of the display 18) and to limit thecounter-rotational movement of the flexible support 16, while allowingsome rotational movement of the support 16 in the manners describedherein. Thus, for example, in FIG. 26, the wire 60 could be replacedwith a series of links forming a bar member 71 in accordance with theprinciples of FIG. 35 or 36, for example, wherein the links 74 and 75are rotationally connected to one another and are disposed such thatthey allow rotation or movement in one direction a certain amount whilenot allowing or at least limiting movement relative to one another inthe other direction. Of course, the flat interconnected longitudinalmembers of FIGS. 35 and 36 could be used in conjunction with the slatsor bars of FIG. 27 to limit both the torsional and the counterrotational movement of the flat support 16 in the manners describedabove.

In the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 44, the band 12 includes or isformed of one or more monolithically integrated, less flexible portions600 combined with one or more hinged, more flexible portions 604. Inother words, the band 12 depicted in FIG. 44 can include one or moreportions constructed in accordance with different configurations of anyone of the bands 12 described herein to provide generally uniformlyconstructed or configured bending structure at different portions orsections of the band.

Generally speaking, the position of the less flexible portions 600corresponds to portions of the article 10 where the required amount offlexing is limited (e.g., the portions of the article 10 disposed on thetop and bottom of a wrist), while the position of the more flexibleportions 604 corresponds to portions of the article 10 where therequired amount of flexing is greater (e.g., the portions of the article10 disposed adjacent the sides of the wrist). In any event, asillustrated in FIG. 44, the band or support member 16 can have anynumber of different sections of portions that allow or enable more orless bending (e.g., that have different minimum radii of curvature ineither or both the rotational and counter-rotational directions) toeffectuate different degrees of bending in these directions.

As discussed above, a flexible electronic component, such as theflexible display 18, has a minimum critical bending radius at which theflexible electronic component can be bent without impairing electronicfunctionality of the flexible electronic component. Generally speaking,the minimum critical bending radius can be measured based on a singlebending motion (i.e., the bending radius past which one or more of theelectronic component layers (e.g., display layers) will break or notfunction based on a single bending motion) or may be measured based onmultiple bending actions over time (i.e., the bending radius past whichmultiple bending actions will, over time, stress and break one of theelectronic component layers or the components on one of the electroniccomponent layers). Thus, the minimum critical bending radius helps todetermine a bending range of the flexible component at which theflexible component may be bent and still function. Of course, a flexiblecomponent may have different minimum critical bending radii in differentbending directions. As used herein, the phrase “bending range” may referto or encompass a bending range for the entire flexible electroniccomponent, a local bending range (i.e., a bending range for at one ormore portions of the electronic component), and/or local variations inthe bending range.

As also briefly discussed above, a flexible support structure orsubstrate can be attached or fixedly coupled to the flexible electroniccomponent (e.g., the display 18) to limit the bending range of theflexible electronic component (e.g., prevent the flexible electroniccomponent from being bent or curved beyond its minimum critical bendingradius) and/or to comply with product requirements (e.g., bendingrequirements/restrictions). Doing so, however, may cause the neutralplane of the electronic component to shift from its initial position (inthe component) to a position closer to or even within the mechanicalsupport structure (i.e., outside of a plane of the component), which, inturn, may significantly increase the minimum critical bending radius ofthe layers in the component, thereby significantly reducing, if noteffectively destroying, the bending ability of the flexible electroniccomponent.

To prevent the flexible electronic component (e.g., the display 18) frombeing bent or curved beyond its minimum critical bending radius, but atthe same time substantially maintain the bending ability of the flexibleelectronic component, the article 10 can, in some cases, include aflexible support that is movably (e.g., slidably) coupled with or to theflexible electronic component in a manner that allows the flexiblesupport and the flexible electronic component to move (e.g., slide)relative to or independently of one another when the article 10 is movedbetween different positions (e.g., between a substantially flat positionand a bent position). Examples of different arrangements are describedin connection with FIGS. 45A-45F, 46A-46H, and 47A-47L. While thesearrangements are generally described as including a flexible display 18,it will be appreciated that these arrangements can instead include adifferent type of flexible electronic component (e.g., a flexibleelectronic circuit, a sensor tag, a flexible OLED light).

Generally speaking, because the flexible electronic component (e.g., thedisplay 18) and the flexible support are movable independently of oneanother, the amount of strain that the flexible support places on theflexible electronic component (e.g., the display 18) when the article 10is being bent or curved is minimized as these structures do not alter oronly minimally alter the neutral plane of the flexible electroniccomponent (e.g., the display 18). This feature, in turn, minimizes theminimum critical bending radius of the flexible electronic componentwhen coupled to the flexible support.

Advantageously, in some of these cases, the flexible support can beremovably coupled to the flexible electronic component (e.g., thedisplay 18) so that the flexible support can be separated from theflexible electronic component. In turn, the flexible electroniccomponent can be easily and quickly placed and associated with anynumber of different objects, items, or devices, such as, for example, acoffee cup, a phone case, a charging stand, or a different flexiblesupport. In the latter case, the flexible support can be removed andinterchanged with a different flexible support selected from one or moredifferent flexible supports. This plurality of different flexiblesupports can include, for example, flexible supports made of a differentmaterial (e.g., leather, plastic, cloth), having a different texture(e.g., smooth, perforated), made of one or more different colors (e.g.,brown, black, white, etc.), associated with a different style, or anycombinations of these features. In this manner, the flexible support,and, more generally, the flexible attachable article 10, can becustomizable. It will be appreciated that, in the same manner, theflexible electronic component can be removed from the flexible supportand the flexible support can be interchanged or connected to a differentflexible electronic component selected from one or more differentflexible components. The different flexible components can include, forexample, one or more different types of flexible components (e.g.,different flexible displays 18, one or more OLED lights, one or moresensor tags, etc.), flexible components made of one or more differentmaterials, flexible components having different thicknesses, etc., orcombinations thereof. In this manner, the flexible electronic component(e.g., the flexible display 18), and, more generally, the flexibleattachable article 10, can be customizable.

FIGS. 45A-45D illustrate a dynamically flexible, attachable article 10,again in the form of a wristband, that includes a flexible electroniccomponent in the form of a display element 696 and a flexible supportstructure or feature 698. The display element 696 includes a flexibleelectronic display 18 disposed (e.g., mounted) on or over a substrate orinterlayer 699. The flexible support structure 698 can generally takethe form of any of the supports 16 described herein or any other supportstructure consistent with the present disclosure. The flexible supportstructure 698 and the substrate 699 generally cooperate to providesupport to, and guide and limit the movement of, the flexible electronicdisplay 18. The flexible support structure 698 is slidably and removablycoupled to the display element 696 in a manner that permits the displayelement 696 and the flexible support structure 698 to slideindependently of one another. For those reasons discussed above, thisfeature minimizes, i.e., allows for the minimum critical bending radiusof the flexible electronic display 18 when coupled to the flexiblesupport structure 698.

As illustrated in FIGS. 45B and 45C, the article 10 includes ahorizontal or longitudinal axis 11. The article 10 illustrated in thisexample also includes the grooves 320 and the projections 324illustrated in FIGS. 9-11. However, these grooves 320 and projections324 are not substantially visible in FIGS. 45A-45E. Still further, thearticle 10 is illustrated in FIGS. 45A-45F as including the claspingstructure 350 illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20. In other examples, thearticle 10 can include additional, different, or fewer connectors, suchas, for example, the recess and tab 300, 304, the magnets 22A, 22B, 24A,and 24B, and/or any of the other connectors described herein.

As illustrated in FIG. 45B, the flexible support 698 of the article 10includes a plurality of elongated slots 700 formed or defined thereinalong the horizontal axis 11. The plurality of slots 700 includes afirst elongated slot 700A and second elongated slots 700B that arelonger (i.e., more elongated) than the first slot 700A. The first andsecond slots 700A, 700B are illustrated as being evenly spaced apartfrom one another across the length of the flexible support 16 but unevenspacing may be used in some embodiments. Each of the second slots 700Bhas a first stop surface 702A and a second stop surface 702B oppositethe first stop surface 702A. The first stop surface 702A generallydefines or corresponds to the most extreme bending that will bepermitted in the inward direction (see the arrows labeled B_(IN) in FIG.45B). The second stop surface 702B generally defines or corresponds tothe most extreme bending that will be permitted in the outward direction(see the arrows labeled B_(OUT) in FIG. 45B).

As illustrated in FIG. 45B, the display element 696 of the article 10includes a plurality of rivets 704 formed on and extending inward from abottom side 706 of the substrate 699. Like the slots 700, the rivets 704are formed along the longitudinal axis 11. The rivets 704 each have asubstantially circular shape and are evenly spaced apart from oneanother across the length of the display element 696. The rivets 704 arethus generally aligned with the slots 700, respectively, when thedisplay element 696 and the flexible support structure 698 are bothflat. More specifically, the rivets 704 are aligned with a center ormiddle portion of the slots 700, respectively (i.e., between the firstand second stop surfaces 702A, 702B), when the display element 696 andthe flexible support structure 698 are both flat. As also illustrated inFIG. 45B, when the article 10 is in a substantially flat position, thedisplay element 696 is longer than the flexible support structure 698.

As illustrated in FIGS. 45C and 45D, when the display element 696 andthe flexible support structure 698 are aligned with one another andplaced together, the flexible support structure 698 can be slidablycoupled with the display element 696 so that the flexible supportstructure 698 is slidable independently of or relative to the displayelement 696. To this end, when the display element 696 and the flexiblesupport structure 698 are placed together, the rivets 704 can bedisposed in a corresponding one of the slots 700. In this example, therivet 704A, which is the rivet most proximate to the electronics module19, is disposed in the slot 700A. Due to the shape of the slot 700A (theslot 700A is just wide enough to accept the rivet 704A), the rivet 704Ais fixedly disposed within the slot 700A (i.e., the rivet 704A does notmove or only moves slightly relative to the slot). The remaining rivets704B are disposed in the slots 700B. Because the slots 700B are longerthan the slot 700A, the rivets 704B are slidable within the slots 700B,respectively, along the horizontal axis 11 of the device 10. Thus, withthe exception of the rivet 704A, which is fixedly disposed within theslot 700A, the flexible support structure 698 is horizontally slidablerelative to or independently of the display element 696.

Accordingly, as the device 10 is bent to form a circular or oval band,as illustrated in FIG. 45E, portions of the flexible support structure698 slide or move relative to the electronic display 18 (andvice-versa). More specifically, when the device 10 is bent in theoutward direction (see the arrows labeled B_(OUT) in FIG. 45B) to form acircular or oval band, as illustrated in FIG. 45E, the rivets 704B slidewithin the slots 700B, respectively. At some point, the device 10 willbe bent to such a degree that the rivets 704B contact the first stopsurface 702B of a respective slot 700B. At this point, the device 10 hasreached its pre-defined bending limit and any further bending of thedevice 10, particularly the flexible display 18, in the outwarddirection is prevented. Conversely, the device 10 can be returned to thesubstantially flat position, as illustrated in FIG. 45B-45D, in asimilar manner. When the device 10 is in the substantially flatposition, and the device 10 is bent or curved in the inward direction(see the arrows labeled B_(IN) in FIG. 45B), the applied bending forcecauses the rivets 704B to slide away from a respective first stopsurface 702B and toward a respective second stop surface 702A. At somepoint, the device 10 will be bent to such a degree (i.e., correspondingto the maximum bending amount in this direction) that the rivets 704Bwill contact the second stop surface 702A of a respective slot 700B. Atthis point, the device 10 has reached its pre-defined bending limit andany further bending of the device 10, particularly the flexible display18, in the inward direction is prevented. In some cases, the slots 700Bmay need to be of varying or different lengths (and may need to increasein length) as they are disposed further away from the slot 700A to allowmovement of the entire flexible support structure 698 so that each ofrivets 704B hits a corresponding stop 702A or 702B at the same bendingradius (simultaneously).

At the same time, because the flexible support 16 is slidably coupled tothe flexible electronic display 18 (and is essentially fixedly attachedto the display 18 at only one point), the arrangement of FIGS. 45A-45Edoes not alter the central bending or neutral plane of the flexibleelectronic display 18, thereby substantially maintaining the bendingability (e.g., the bending range) of the electronic display 18. In otherwords, such an arrangement leaves the article 10 with a bending rangethat is substantially similar to the bending range of the flexibleelectronic display 18 itself.

In view of the foregoing, it should be appreciated that the flexiblesupport structure 698 is removably and slidably coupled with theflexible electronic display 18. Accordingly, the flexible supportstructure 698 is both customizable and provides for a larger bendingrange of the display 18 when the display element 696 is disposed on andcoupled to the support structure 698. As a result, the flexible support698 can be removed (in a similar manner as described above) andinterchanged with a different flexible support 698. The differentflexible support 698 can have a similar structure (i.e., the differentflexible support 698 also includes the slots 700), can have a differentstructure, have a different color (e.g., brown, black, white), be madeof a different material (e.g., leather, plastic, cloth, metal), can haveor be associated with a different style (e.g., classic, professional),have a different texture (e.g., smooth, perforated), or combinationsthereof. As illustrated in FIG. 45F, the flexible support 698illustrated in FIG. 45E has been removed and interchanged with adifferent flexible support that is similarly structured but has adifferent color and a different texture. Of course, this process can berepeated any number of times, as desired.

In some cases, other components of the article 10, such as, for example,the clasping structure 350 and/or the rivets 704, can be removed andinterchanged with different structures. These different structures can,but need not, be selected based upon the selected different flexiblesupport 698. The clasping structure 350 can, for example, be removedfrom the article 10 and interchanged with one or more differentmechanical connectors. These different mechanical connectors may includea structurally similar clasping structure 350 made of a different colorand/or may include structurally different connectors. Similarly, therivets 704 can be removed from the display element 696 and interchangedwith structurally similar rivets 704 having a different color and/ordifferent structures (e.g., projections, tabs, etc.).

In other examples, the article 10 can vary from the one illustrated inFIGS. 45A-45D in other manners. The flexible support 698 can, forexample, include a different number of slots 700, can includedifferently positioned slots 700 (e.g., slots 700 positioned closer toor further from one another), and/or can include differently constructedslots 700 (e.g., slots 700 having a different length and/or shape). Inone example, the flexible support 698 can include two rows of slots 700(e.g., two parallel rows of slots 700). The slots 700 can, for example,instead take the form of openings, apertures, tracks, channels, grooves,recesses, or any other suitable structure. The flexible electroniccomponent can, for example, take the form of a collapsible e-reader, aroll-out screen, an OLED light, or other electronic component instead ofthe display element 696. The flexible substrate 699 can, for example,include a different number of rivets 704, can include differentlypositioned rivets 704 (e.g., rivets 704 positioned closer to or furtherfrom one another), and/or can include differently constructed rivets 704(e.g., rivets 704 having a different length and/or shape). When, forexample, the flexible support 698 includes two rows of slots 700, theflexible substrate 699 can likewise include two rows of rivets 704. Suchan arrangement would advantageously provide torsion control. The rivets704 can, as another example, instead take the form of latches, tabs,hooks, knobs, bumps, projections, or any other suitable structure. Inone example, the slot 700A and the rivet 704A (the fixedly attachedportions) can be located at a different location, such as, for example,at the other end of the article 10, in the middle of the article 10, orin some other location. In another example, the article 10 can includemore than one slot 700A and more than one rivet 704A (i.e., more thanone fixedly attached portions). In some examples, the display element696 and the flexible support 698 can be movably coupled to one anotherin a different way. The display element 696 and the flexible support 698can, for example, be snapped together, hooked together, latchedtogether, or coupled to one another in some other manner at one or morelocations such as at the location of the rivet 704A and the slot 700A.

FIGS. 46A-46D illustrate a dynamically flexible, attachable article 10,again in the form of a wristband, that includes a flexible supportstructure 16 and a flexible electronic component in the form of aflexible electronic display 18 movably disposed within the flexiblesupport structure 16. The article 10 also includes a horizontal orlongitudinal axis 11 and a spring element 21. Though not expresslyillustrated herein, the article 10 can include one or more connectorsdescribed herein, such as, for example, the grooves 320 and theprojections 324 illustrated in FIGS. 9-11, the clasping structure 350illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20, and/or any of the other connectorsdescribed herein.

The flexible support structure 16 is generally configured to providesupport to the flexible electronic display 18. The flexible supportstructure 16 can be made of any suitable flexible suitable material suchas, for example, cloth, leather, plastic, metal, or other material. Asillustrated in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the flexible support structure 16 inthis example has or is defined by a longitudinally-extending, elongatebottom wall 750 and a pair of opposing sidewalls 754 that extend upward,at an angle substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 11,from a longitudinally-extending perimeter edge of the bottom wall 750.As illustrated in FIG. 46B, a lubricant 756 (e.g., oil, graphite, PTFE)can be disposed on (e.g., applied to) the bottom wall 750, or portionsthereof, to facilitate movement between the support structure 16 and theflexible electronic display 18. The flexible support structure 16further has a retaining portion 758 that extends laterally inward from atop portion of each of the opposing walls 754, such that the retainingportions 758 hang over the bottom wall 750 of the support structure 16.Together, the bottom wall 750, the sidewalls 754, and the retainingportions 758 define a cavity 762 sized to support and receive theflexible electronic display 18 therein. As illustrated in FIG. 46B, thecavity 762 has a substantially rectangular-shape in cross-section.

The flexible electronic display 18 can generally take the form of any ofthe displays 18 described herein or a different display 18 consistentwith any of the embodiments described herein. Although not illustratedherein, the flexible electronic display 18 can, but need not, include ananti-reflective coating applied thereon in an effort to optimize theoptical performance of the display 18. As illustrated in FIG. 46C, whenthe article 10 is in a substantially flat position, the flexible display18 is shorter than the flexible support structure 16, though this neednot be the case (e.g., the display 18 and the support 16 can have thesame length).

The spring element 21 is provided to apply tension to one end of theflexible electronic display 18. This applied tension facilitates thesliding movement between the flexible support structure 16 and theflexible electronic display 18 and helps to keep the electronic display18 taut (i.e., in a substantially flat configuration) at all times. Inthe illustrated example, the spring element 21 is a substantially flatspring having a first end 21A and a second end 21B opposite the firstend 21A. In other examples, the spring element 21 can be a differenttype of spring (e.g., a coil spring, a leaf spring) or take a differentform and yet still be suited for the intended purpose. For example, thespring element 21 can take the form of a small cylinder with an axledisposed therethrough. As another example, the spring element 21 cantake the form of a mechanical slider.

As illustrated in FIG. 46B, the flexible electronic display 18 can beseated or disposed in the cavity 762. In turn, the sidewalls 754 of theflexible support structure 16 extend upward adjacent and in some casesabove the edges of the flexible display 18, such that the sidewalls 754can provide side impact protection for the flexible display 18. Inaddition, the retaining portions 758, which extend inward of the edgesof the flexible display 18, can contact a top surface 764 of theflexible display 18 to prevent the flexible display 18 from exiting theflexible support structure 16, thereby retaining the flexible display 18within the flexible support structure 16.

As illustrated in FIG. 46C, the spring element 21 is coupled to aportion of the flexible support structure 16 and coupled to a portion ofthe flexible electronic display 18 at one end of the flexible electronicdisplay 18. Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 46A and 46C, the end21A of the spring element 21 is fixedly attached (e.g., adhered) to aportion of the bottom wall 750 of the support structure 16, and the end21B is fixedly attached (e.g., adhered) to a bottom surface of theflexible display 18 at one end 18A of the flexible electronic display18. The spring element 21 in this example is thus disposed between theflexible support structure 16 and the flexible electronic display 18. Inother examples, the spring element 21 can be coupled in a differentmanner. The spring element 21 can be coupled to a different portion ofthe flexible support structure 16 (e.g., to the sidewalls 754), can becoupled to a different portion of the flexible electronic display 18(e.g., to the end 18A itself), and/or can be coupled at the other end18B of the flexible electronic display 18. When, for example, the springelement 21 takes the form of a small cylinder with an axle disposedtherethrough, the display 18 can be attached to the cylinder (e.g., toone or both ends of the cylinder) such that the display 18 can be rolledor unrolled when the article 10 is bent. In one case, the display 18 canbe attached to the cylinder such that the display 18 can partiallyrotate (i.e., turn by a certain amount of degrees) when the article 10is bent, thereby rolling or unrolling a part of the display that isattached to the cylinder. Alternatively, the cylinder can be coupled toor at one end of the display 18 and the axle can be movably coupled tothe flexible support structure 16 (e.g., via a slot formed in thesidewalls 754) when the article 10 is bent. When, for example, thespring element 21 takes the form of a mechanical slider, the mechanicalslider can be attached to or at one end of the display 18 and movablycoupled to the flexible support structure 16 (e.g., via rails disposedon the bottom wall 750 of the support structure 16). It will beappreciated that the article 10 can also include an additional springelement 21, with one spring element 21 being configured to apply tensionto each of the ends 18A, 18B of the flexible electronic display 18.

In this manner, the flexible display 18 is slidably coupled with or tothe flexible support structure 16 (and vice-versa), with the flexibledisplay 18 being slidable independently of or relative to the flexiblesupport structure 16 (and vice-versa). Accordingly, as the article 10 isbent to form a circular or oval band, as illustrated in FIG. 46D, theflexible display 18 moves independently or relative to correspondingportions of the flexible support structure 16 (and vice-versa). At thesame time, the spring element 21 applies a tension force to the end 18Aof the flexible electronic display 18, thereby facilitating thismovement and helping to keep the flexible electronic display 18 taut.Like the spring element 21, the lubricant 756 helps to facilitate themovement between the support structure 16 and the display 18. Morespecifically, when the article 10 is bent to form a circular or ovalband, as illustrated in FIG. 46D, the spring element 21 pulls on the end18A of the flexible display 18 and the ends 18A, 18B of the flexibledisplay 18 slide within the cavity 762, relative to the flexible support16 and toward one another, thereby creating a small degree of separationbetween ends of the flexible display and ends of the bottom wall 750.With reference to FIGS. 46C and 46D, when the article 10 is bent to forma circular or oval bend, point A_(D) of the flexible display 18 slides,relative to point A_(S) of the flexible support structure 16, therebycreating spacing S between point A_(D) and A_(S). At some point, thearticle 10 can be bent to such a degree that the retaining portions 758contact corresponding portions of the top surface 764 of the display 18.However, the support structure in the bottom wall 750 may limit thebending motion of the bottom wall and thus the bending motion of thedisplay 18 to a predetermined minimal bending radius. At this point, thearticle 10 has reached its pre-defined bending limit and any furtherbending of the article 10, particularly the flexible display 18, in theoutward direction is prevented. Conversely, the article 10 can bereturned to the substantially flat position, as illustrated in FIGS. 46Aand 46B, in a similar manner.

At the same time, because the flexible support 16 is slidably coupled toor with the flexible electronic display 18, the arrangement illustratedin FIGS. 46A-46D does not alter the central bending or neutral plane ofthe flexible electronic display 18, thereby substantially maintainingthe bending ability (e.g., the bending range) of the display 18. Inother words, such an arrangement leaves the article 10 with a bendingrange that is substantially similar to the bending range of the flexibleelectronic display 18 itself.

In other examples, the article 10 can vary from the one illustrated inFIGS. 46A-D. The flexible support 16 illustrated in FIGS. 46A-D can varyin shape and/or size. The flexible support 16 can, for example, bewider, thereby creating more space between the flexible display 18 andthe sidewalls 754. The sidewalls 754 can, for example, be angled more orless relative to the bottom wall 750. The retaining portions 758 can,for example, be constructed differently (e.g., can extend along only aportion of the length of the article 10, can be angled more or lessrelative to the sidewalls 754). The cavity 762 can be of a differentsize (e.g., smaller, larger) and/or can have a different shape incross-section. As yet another example, the flexible support 16 need notinclude the retaining portions 758. Instead, the flexible support 16 canbe slidably or otherwise movably coupled with the flexible display 18 ina different way (e.g., using angled sidewalls 754). The flexibleelectronic display 18 can also take the form of a different flexibleelectronic component, such as, for example, a sensor tag, a flexibleOLED light, a flexible electronic circuit, or a collapsible e-reader.

FIGS. 46E-46H illustrate a dynamically flexible, attachable article 10,again in the form of a wristband, that is substantially similar to thearticle 10 illustrated in FIGS. 46A-46D. The article 10 in this caseincludes a flexible support structure 16 and a flexible electroniccomponent in the form of a flexible electronic display 18 that ismovably disposed within the flexible support structure 16. The article10 also includes a horizontal or longitudinal axis 11 and a springelement, similar to the spring element 21 illustrated in FIGS. 46A-46D,though the spring element is not illustrated in FIGS. 46E-46H forclarity reasons. Unlike the article 10 illustrated in FIGS. 46A-46D, thearticle 10 illustrated in this example further includes a flexible orbendable and transparent sheet of material 800 disposed on the supportstructure 16 and over the flexible electronic display 18. Though notexpressly illustrated herein, the article 10 can include one or moreconnectors described herein, such as, for example, the grooves 320 andthe projections 324 illustrated in FIGS. 9-11, the clasping structure350 illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20, and/or any of the other connectorsdescribed herein.

The flexible sheet 800 illustrated in FIG. 46E has a substantiallyrectangular shape similar to the shape of the flexible support structure16 and the display 18. The sheet 800 in this example has a width that islarger than a width of the display 18 and that is substantially equal tothe width of the flexible support structure 16. The sheet 800 is agenerally transparent layer, such that image content provided on thedisplay 18 is viewable through the sheet 800. The sheet 800 can be madeof any suitable flexible or bendable material, such as, for example,plastic (e.g., acrylic), glass (e.g., Plexiglass), and/or any otherflexible material(s). Though not illustrated herein, an anti-reflectivecoating can, in some cases, be applied to the sheet 800 to optimize theoptimal performance of the article 10.

The flexible support structure 16 is generally configured to providesupport to the flexible electronic display 18. The flexible supportstructure 16 can be made of any suitable flexible material such as, forexample, cloth, leather, plastic, metal, or other material(s). Asillustrated in FIGS. 46E and 46F, the flexible support structure 16 hasor is defined by a longitudinally-extending, elongate bottom wall 804and a pair of opposing sidewalls 808 that extend upward from alongitudinally-extending perimeter edge of the bottom wall 804. Thoughnot illustrated herein, a lubricant (e.g., oil, graphite, PTFE) can bedisposed on (e.g., applied to) the bottom wall 804, or portions thereof,to facilitate the movement described below between the support structure16 and the flexible electronic display 18. Together, the bottom wall 804and the sidewalls 808 define a cavity 812 sized to support and receivethe flexible electronic display 18 therein. As illustrated in FIG. 46F,the cavity 812 has a substantially rectangular-shape in cross-section.Each sidewall 808 has an exposed portion 816 sized to support andreceive a corresponding portion of the layer 800 thereon.

The flexible electronic display 18 can generally take the form of any ofthe displays 18 described herein or a different display 18 consistentwith the embodiments described herein. Although not illustrated herein,the flexible electronic display 18 can, but need not, include ananti-reflective coating applied thereon in an effort to optimize theoptical performance of the display 18. As illustrated in FIG. 46F, theflexible electronic display 18 can be seated or disposed in the cavity812. As illustrated in FIG. 46G, when the article 10 is in asubstantially flat position, the flexible display 18 is shorter than theflexible support structure 16, though this need not be the case (e.g.,the display 18 and the support 16 can have the same length). Withreference back to FIG. 46F, the sidewalls 808 of the flexible supportstructure 16 extend upward above and circumscribe the edges of theflexible display 18, such that the sidewalls 808 can provide side impactprotection for the flexible display 18. The flexible sheet 800 can, inturn, be disposed on the flexible support structure 16 and may beattached to the sidewalls 808 via, for example, adhesive. Moreparticularly, portions of an underside 820 of the layer 800 can bedisposed on the respective exposed portion 816 of the sidewalls 808 ofthe flexible support structure 16, as illustrated in FIG. 46F. The layer800 can be secured (e.g., adhered) in this position in any known manner(e.g., using adhesive). So secured, the layer 800 is configured toretain (e.g., seal) the flexible display 18 within the support structure16. In this manner, the flexible support structure 16 is slidablycoupled with or to the flexible electronic display 18 (and vice-versa),with the flexible support structure 16 being slidable independently ofor relative to the flexible electronic display 18 (and vice-versa).

Accordingly, as the article 10 is bent to form a circular or oval band,as illustrated in FIG. 46H, the flexible display 18 moves independentlyor relative to corresponding portions of the flexible support structure16. More specifically, when the article 10 is bent to form a circular oroval band, as illustrated in FIG. 46H, end portions of the flexibledisplay 18 slide within the cavity 762, relative to the flexible supportstructure 16 and toward one another, thereby creating a small degree ofvertical separation between some portions of the flexible display 18 andthe bottom wall 750. Moreover, with reference to FIGS. 46G and 46H, whenthe article 10 is bent to form a circular or oval bend, point A_(D) ofthe flexible display 18 slides, relative to point A_(S) of the flexiblesupport structure 16, thereby creating spacing S between point A_(D) andA_(S). At some point, the article 10 can be bent to such a degree thatportions of the flexible display 18 contact corresponding portions ofthe underside 820 of the layer 800 or to the limits of the bendingcharacteristics of the bottom wall 750. At this point, the article 10has reached its pre-defined bending limit and any further bending of thearticle 10, particularly the flexible display 18, in the outwarddirection is prevented. Conversely, the article 10 can be returned tothe substantially flat position, as illustrated in FIGS. 46E and 46F, ina similar manner.

At the same time, because the flexible support 16 is slidably coupled toor with the flexible electronic display 18, the arrangement illustratedin FIGS. 46E-46H does not alter the central bending or neutral plane ofthe flexible electronic display 18, thereby substantially maintainingthe bending ability (e.g., the bending range) of the display 18. Inother words, such an arrangement leaves the article 10 with a bendingrange that is substantially similar to the bending range of the flexibleelectronic display 18 itself.

In other examples, the article 10 can vary from the one illustrated inFIGS. 46E-46H. The flexible support 16 illustrated in FIGS. 46E-46H canvary in shape and/or size. The flexible support 16 can, for example, bewider, thereby creating more space between the flexible display 18 andthe sidewalls 808. The sidewalls 808 can, for example, be angled more orless relative to the bottom wall 804. The flexible electronic display 18can also take the form of a different flexible electronic component,such as, for example, a sensor tag, a flexible OLED light, a flexibleelectronic circuit, or a collapsible e-reader. The sheet 800 can alsovary in shape and/or size. The sheet 800 can, for example, have a widththat is smaller than support structure 16 and that is substantiallyequal to the display 18 (e.g., the sheet 800 can be securely disposedbetween the sidewalls 808 and over the display 18). The sheet 800 canalso be coupled to the support structure 16 in a different manner (e.g.,using mechanical connectors) and/or in a different location. In somecases, an index-matched material (e.g., an index-matched fluid) can bedisposed between the display 18 and the sheet 800 to optimize theoptical performance of the article 10. In any event, as will beunderstood, the sheet 800 provides protection to the display 18 andhelps to retain the display in the cavity 812 during use. The bottomwall 804, the sidewalls 808 and the sheet 800 further operate to preventdirt and contaminants from entering the cavity 812.

FIGS. 47A-47C illustrate yet another dynamically flexible, attachablearticle 10, again in the form of a wristband. The article 10 in thisexample includes a flexible electronic component, again in the form of aflexible electronic display 18, and a pair of flexible supportstructures, a first flexible support structure 16 and a second flexiblesupport structure 850. The article 10 also includes a horizontal orlongitudinal axis 11. Though not expressly illustrated herein, thearticle 10 can include one or more connectors described herein, such as,for example, the grooves 320 and the projections 324 illustrated inFIGS. 9-11, the clasping structure 350 illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20,and/or any of the other connectors described herein.

The first flexible support 16 in this example can generally take theform of any of the flexible supports 16 described herein, and is made ofa first flexible or bendable material, such as, for example, cloth,leather, plastic, metal, and/or any other suitable flexible material.

As illustrated in FIGS. 47A and 47B, the second flexible supportstructure 850 has or is defined by a longitudinally-extending, elongatebottom wall 854 and a pair of opposing sidewalls 858 that extend upward,at an angle perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 11, from alongitudinally-extending perimeter edge of the bottom wall 854.Together, the bottom wall 854 and the sidewalls 858 define a cavity 862sized to support and receive the flexible electronic display 18 therein.As illustrated in FIG. 47B, the cavity 862 has a substantiallyrectangular-shape in cross-section.

The second flexible support structure 850 also has or includes a slot orchannel 866 formed therethrough. The slot 866 extends between one end870A of the support structure 850 and the other end 866B of the supportstructure 850. The slot 866 is formed proximate to, but is spatiallyseparate from, the cavity 862, as illustrated in FIG. 47B. The secondflexible support structure 850 is, in this example, made of a secondflexible material that has a lower Young's Modulus (i.e., is moreelastic) than the first flexible material. Preferably, the secondflexible material also has a lower Young's Modulus (i.e., is moreelastic) than the flexible display 18 as well, though this need not bethe case. The second flexible material can, for example, be cloth,rubber, leather, nylon, plastic (e.g., PTFE), and/or any other suitableflexible material. In one example, the second flexible material can berubber having a Young's modulus of 0.02 G*Pa. In any event, the secondflexible support structure 850 is generally more elastic, or less stiff,than the first flexible support structure 16. In some cases, the secondflexible material can be significantly more elastic than the firstflexible material and can be highly elastic or bendable.

As illustrated in FIG. 47B, the flexible electronic display 18 can beseated or disposed in the cavity 862 defined in the second flexiblesupport structure 850. In this case, the flexible electronic display 18is adhered to the second flexible support structure 850 using any knownadhesive, such as, for example, glue, though in other examples, theflexible electronic display 18 can be secured thereto in a differentmanner (e.g., using mechanical connectors). Though not explicitlyillustrated herein, the flexible electronic display 18 in this exampleis shorter than the flexible support structure 16 and the flexiblesupport structure 850, though this need not be the case. In any event,the sidewalls 858 of the flexible support structure 850 extend upwardadjacent and circumscribe the edges of the flexible display 18, suchthat the sidewalls 858 can provide side impact protection for theflexible display 18. Although not illustrated herein, the flexibleelectronic display 18 can, but need not, include an anti-reflectivecoating applied thereon in an effort to optimize the optical performanceof the display 18.

As also illustrated in FIG. 47B, the first flexible support structure 16can be movably seated or disposed within the slot 866 of the secondflexible support structure 850. The first flexible support structure 16can be retained within the slot 866 (if desired) via friction, and may,if desired, be secured at, for example, one point in the slot, usingadhesive (e.g., glue), or via some other manner. Though not illustratedherein, a lubricant (e.g., oil, graphite, PTFE) can be disposed betweenthe second flexible support structure 850 and the slot 866, or portionsthereof, to facilitate movement therebetween. Though also notillustrated herein, the article 10 can include one or more springelements, such as the spring element 21 illustrated above, for applyingtension to one or both ends of the flexible support 16 so as tofacilitate the movement between the second flexible support structure850 and the first flexible support structure 16 and/or to help keep theflexible support 16 taut (i.e., in a substantially flat position) as thearticle 10 is being bent or curved. In any event, the first flexiblesupport structure 16, by virtue of being made from stiffer material thanthe second flexible support structure 850, provides some rigidity to theoverall support structure for the flexible electronic display 18,thereby providing some support to the flexible display 18. Moreover,because the first flexible support structure 16 is movably coupled to orwith the flexible display 18 (and vice-versa), the flexible display 18is movable relative to or independently of the flexible supportstructure 16 (and vice-versa).

Accordingly, as the article 10 is bent to form a circular or oval band,as illustrated in FIG. 47C, the flexible support structure 16 and theflexible display 18 move (e.g., bend) independently of one another. Morespecifically, when the article 10 is bent to form a circular or ovalband, as illustrated in FIG. 47C, the first flexible support structure16 bends within the slot 866, while the flexible display 18 bends withinthe cavity 862 of the second flexible support structure 850. The firstflexible support structure 16 thus moves or slides in the cavity 862with respect to the second support structure 850.

At the same time, because the flexible support 16 is movably coupled toor with the flexible electronic display 18, the arrangement illustratedin FIGS. 47A-47C does not alter the central bending or neutral plane ofthe flexible electronic display 18, thereby substantially maintainingthe bending ability (e.g., the bending range) of the display 18. Inother words, such an arrangement leaves the article 10 with a bendingrange that is substantially similar to the bending range of the flexibleelectronic display 18 itself.

In other examples, the article 10 can vary from the one illustrated inFIGS. 47A-47C. The flexible support structure 16 can, for example, varyin shape (e.g., the flexible support structure 16 need not have asubstantially rectangular-shape) and/or vary in size (e.g., the flexiblesupport structure 16 can be shorter than the flexible support 850).Alternatively or additionally, the flexible support structure 850 canvary in shape and/or size. The sidewalls 858 can, for example, be angledmore or less relative to the bottom wall 854. The sidewalls 858 can, forexample, include retaining portions (similar to the retaining portions758 described above) that contact a top surface of the flexible display18 to retain the flexible display 18 within the flexible support 850.The slot 866 can, for example, have a differently shaped cross-section,be formed through a different portion of the flexible support structure850, and/or only extend through a portion of the flexible supportstructure 850. The flexible electronic display 18 can also take the formof a different flexible electronic component, such as, for example, asensor tag, a flexible OLED light, a flexible electronic circuit, or acollapsible e-reader.

FIGS. 47D-47F illustrate yet another dynamically flexible, attachablearticle 10, again in the form of a wristband, that is substantiallysimilar to the article 10 illustrated in FIGS. 47A-47C. The article 10in this example includes a flexible electronic component, again in theform of a flexible electronic display 18, and a pair of flexible supportstructures, a first flexible support structure 16 and a second flexiblesupport structure 900. The article 10 also includes a horizontal orlongitudinal axis 11. Though not expressly illustrated herein, thearticle 10 can include one or more connectors described herein, such as,for example, the grooves 320 and the projections 324 illustrated inFIGS. 9-11, the clasping structure 350 illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20,and/or any of the other connectors described herein.

The first flexible support 16 in this example can generally take theform of any of the flexible supports 16 described herein, and is made ofa first flexible material, such as, for example, cloth, leather,plastic, metal, and/or any other suitable flexible material.

As illustrated in FIGS. 47D and 47E, the second flexible supportstructure 900 has or is defined by a longitudinally-extending, elongatebottom wall 904 and a pair of opposing sidewalls 908 that extend upward,at an angle perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 11, from alongitudinally-extending perimeter edge of the bottom wall 904.Together, the bottom wall 904 and the sidewalls 908 define a cavity 912sized to support and receive the flexible electronic display 18 therein.As illustrated in FIG. 47E, the cavity 912 has a substantiallyrectangular-shape in cross-section.

Like the second flexible support structure 850 described above, thesecond flexible support structure 900 is, in this example, made of asecond flexible material that has a lower Young's Modulus (i.e., is moreelastic) than the first flexible material. Preferably, the secondflexible material also has a lower Young's Modulus (i.e., is moreelastic) than the flexible display 18 as well, though this need not bethe case. The second flexible material can, for example, be cloth,rubber, leather, nylon, plastic (e.g., PTFE), and/or any other suitableflexible material. In one example, the second flexible material can berubber having a Young's modulus of 0.02 G*Pa. In any event, the secondflexible support structure 900 is generally more elastic, or less stiff,than the first flexible support structure 16. In some cases, the secondflexible material can be significantly more elastic than the firstflexible material and can be highly elastic or bendable.

As illustrated in FIG. 47E, both the first flexible support structure 16and the flexible electronic display 18 can be seated or disposed in thecavity 862 defined in the second flexible support structure 850. In thiscase, the flexible support structure 16 is disposed in the cavity 862along or on the bottom wall 904, with the flexible electronic display 18disposed on, and is thus in contact with, the flexible support structure16. In turn, the sidewalls 908 of the flexible support structure 900extend upward adjacent and circumscribe the edges of the flexibledisplay 18, such that the sidewalls 908 can provide side impactprotection for the flexible display 18. Though not explicitlyillustrated herein, the flexible electronic display 18 in this exampleis shorter than the flexible support structure 16 and the flexiblesupport structure 900, though this need not be the case. Although notillustrated herein, the flexible electronic display 18 can, but neednot, include an anti-reflective coating applied thereon in an effort tooptimize the optical performance of the display 18.

The first flexible support structure 16 or the flexible electronicdisplay 18 can be secured to the flexible support structure 900, ifdesired. This can be done via friction, using adhesive (e.g., glue), orvia some other manner. Though not illustrated herein, a lubricant (e.g.,oil, graphite, PTFE) can be disposed between (i) the flexible support 16and the flexible display 18, and/or (ii) the flexible support 16 and theflexible support structure 900, to facilitate movement of thesecomponents relative to one another. Though also not illustrated herein,the article 10 can include one or more spring elements, such as one ormore of the spring elements 21 described above, for applying tension toone or both ends of the flexible support 16 and/or one or both ends ofthe flexible display 18 so as to facilitate the movement therebetweenand/or to help keep the flexible support 16 and/or the flexible display18 taut (i.e., in a substantially flat position) as the article 10 isbeing bent or curved. In any event, the first flexible support structure16, by virtue of being made from stiffer material than the secondflexible support structure 900, provides some rigidity to the overallsupport structure for the flexible electronic display 18, therebyproviding some support to the flexible display 18. Moreover, because thefirst flexible support structure 16 is movably coupled to or with theflexible display 18 (and vice-versa), the flexible display 18 is movablerelative to or independently of the flexible support structure 16 (andvice-versa).

Accordingly, as the article 10 is bent to form a circular or oval band,as illustrated in FIG. 47F, the flexible support structure 16 and theflexible display 18 move (e.g., bend) independently of one another. Morespecifically, when the article 10 is bent to form a circular or ovalband, as illustrated in FIG. 47E, the first flexible support structure16 and the flexible display 18 each bend within the cavity 912 of thesecond flexible support structure 900, with the first flexible supportstructure 16 moving or sliding in the cavity 912 with respect to theflexible display 18 (and vice-versa).

Because the flexible support 16 is movably coupled to or with theflexible electronic display 18, the arrangement illustrated in FIGS.47D-47F does not alter the central bending or neutral plane of theflexible electronic display 18, thereby substantially maintaining thebending ability (e.g., the bending range) of the display 18. In otherwords, such an arrangement leaves the article 10 with a bending rangethat is substantially similar to the bending range of the flexibleelectronic display 18 itself.

In other examples, the article 10 can vary from the one illustrated inFIGS. 47D-47F. The flexible support structure 16 can, for example, varyin shape (e.g., the flexible support structure 16 need not have asubstantially rectangular-shape) and/or vary in size (e.g., the flexiblesupport structure 16 can be shorter than the flexible support 900).Alternatively or additionally, the flexible support structure 900 canvary in shape and/or size. The sidewalls 908 can, for example, be angledmore or less relative to the bottom wall 904. The sidewalls 908 can, forexample, include retaining portions (similar to the retaining portions758 described above) that contact a top surface of the flexible display18 to retain the flexible display 18 within the flexible support 850.The flexible electronic display 18 can also take the form of a differentflexible electronic component, such as, for example, a sensor tag, aflexible OLED light, a flexible electronic circuit, or a collapsiblee-reader.

FIGS. 47G-47I illustrate yet another dynamically flexible, attachablearticle 10, again in the form of a wristband, that is a more detailedversion of the article 10 illustrated in FIGS. 47D-47F. The article 10in this example includes a flexible electronic component, again in theform of a flexible electronic display 18, and a pair of flexible orbendable support structures, a first flexible support structure 16 and asecond flexible support structure 950. The article 10 also includes ahorizontal or longitudinal axis 11 and a clasp 952. The clasp 952 can beany type of mechanical clasp or connection structure that functions toconnect the end pieces of the article 10 together when the article 10 isbent, as illustrated in FIGS. 47G and 47H, to form a circular or ovalband. Though not expressly illustrated herein, the article 10 canalternatively or additionally include one or more connectors describedherein, such as, for example, the grooves 320 and the projections 324illustrated in FIGS. 9-11, the clasping structure 350 illustrated inFIGS. 19 and 20, and/or any of the other connectors described herein.

As shown in FIG. 47H, which depicts a cross-sectional view of thearticle 10, the first flexible support structure 16 is a generallyrectangular, flexible or bendable body or spine. The first flexiblesupport structure 16 includes one or more electronics modules 19 and aplurality of links 954 disposed therebetween. The links 954 are made ofa first material, such as, for example, metal (e.g., stainless steel),that is substantially rigid. The electronics module 19 and the links 954are pivotally connected to one another via a plurality of pins 958. Inthe depicted version, the first flexible support structure 16 includestwo electronics modules 19A, 19B, with the electronics module 19Aincluding a battery, while the electronics module 19B including all ofthe other necessary electronics components, such as, for example, aprocessor, a computer-readable memory, a communication module, a displaydriver, a touch screen controller, one or more sensors, and/or any otherelectronics components. In the depicted version, each link 954 has anarched or curved shape. By being pivotally connected to one another viathe pins 958, the modules 19A, 19B and the links 954 can be moved fromthe curved or bent position shown in FIG. 47H to the substantially flatposition shown in FIG. 47I.

The flexible electronic display 18 can generally take the form of any ofthe displays 18 described herein or a different display 18 consistentwith any of the embodiments described herein. Although not illustratedherein, the flexible electronic display 18 can, but need not, include ananti-reflective coating applied thereon in an effort to optimize theoptical performance of the display 18. As illustrated in FIG. 47H, theflexible display 18 is generally shorter than the flexible supportstructure 16, though this need not be the case (e.g., the display 18 andthe support 16 can have the same length).

As illustrated in FIGS. 47H and 47I, the second flexible supportstructure 950 has or includes a housing 962 that is made of a secondmaterial, such as, for example, rubber, leather, nylon, plastic (e.g.,PTFE), and/or any other suitable flexible material. The second materialis more flexible than the first material from which the structure 16 ismade, and, in some cases, is more flexible than the display 18 as well.The second flexible material can, for example, have a lower Young'sModulus (i.e., be more elastic) than the first material. In some cases,the second flexible material can be significantly more elastic than thefirst material and can be highly elastic or bendable.

As best shown in FIG. 47G, the housing 962 of the second flexiblesupport structure 950 has or is defined by a longitudinally-extendingbellowed bottom wall 964 and a pair of opposing sidewalls 968 thatextend upward, at an angle perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 11,from a longitudinally-extending perimeter edge of the bottom wall 964.Together, the bottom wall 964 and the sidewalls 968 define a cavity 972sized to support and receive the first flexible support structure 16 andthe flexible electronic display 18 therein. The bottom wall 964 is thuspositioned radially inward of the cavity 972, and, thus, the firstflexible support structure 16 and the display 18. As shown in FIG. 47H,the bellowed bottom wall 964 includes a plurality of roots 976 and aplurality of crests 978 movably disposed therebetween. In this manner,the bellowed bottom wall 974 is configured to facilitate controlledbending of the first flexible support structure 16 and the display 18,as will be described in greater detail below.

Both the first flexible support structure 16 and the flexible electronicdisplay 18 can be seated or disposed in the cavity 972 defined in thehousing of the second flexible support structure 950. In this case, theflexible support structure 16 is disposed in the cavity 972 along or on,and radially outward of, the bottom wall 964. Portions of the flexiblesupport structure 16 can be fixedly attached (e.g., adhered) to portionsof the bellowed wall 964. In this version, the electronics modules 19Aand 19B are fixedly attached (e.g., adhered) to corresponding portionsof the bellowed wall 964, and the roots 976 of the bellowed wall arefixedly attached (e.g., adhered) to the first flexible support structure16 underneath or proximate to a respective one of the pins 958.Additionally, the flexible electronic display 18 is disposed on, and isthus in contact with, the flexible support structure 16. In turn, thesidewalls 968 of the flexible support structure 950 extend upwardadjacent and circumscribe the edges of the first flexible supportstructure 16 and the flexible display 18, such that the sidewalls 968can provide side impact protection for both components. The flexibledisplay 18 can, if desired, be secured to the second flexible supportstructure 950 (e.g., the sidewalls 968) via friction, using adhesive(e.g., glue), or via some other manner. As best illustrated in FIG. 47H,with the first flexible support structure 16 and the flexible electronicdisplay 18 disposed in the described manner, the first and secondflexible support structures 16, 950 define a pair of pockets 980 eachconfigured to slidably receive a portion of the flexible display 18. Inthis way, the pockets 980 facilitate a controlled movement of thearticle 10 and facilitate movement of the first flexible supportstructure 16 relative to the display 18 (and vice-versa).

Though not illustrated herein, a lubricant (e.g., oil, graphite, PTFE)can be disposed between the first flexible support structure 16 and theflexible display 18 to facilitate movement of these components relativeto one another. Though also not illustrated herein, the article 10 caninclude one or more spring elements, such as one or more of the springelements 21 described above, for applying tension to one or both ends ofthe flexible display 18 so as to facilitate the movement of the display18 relative to the first flexible support structure 16 and/or to helpkeep the flexible display 18 taut (i.e., in a substantially flatposition) as the article 10 is being bent or curved.

The first flexible support structure 16, by virtue of being made fromstiffer material than the second flexible support structure 950,provides some rigidity to the overall support structure for the flexibleelectronic display 18, thereby providing some support to the flexibledisplay 18, as well as some bending angle control and some torsioncontrol. Moreover, because the first flexible support structure 16 ismovably (e.g., slidably) coupled to or with the flexible display 18 (andvice-versa), the flexible display 18 is movable relative to orindependently of the flexible support structure 16 (and vice-versa).

Accordingly, when the article 10 is moved between the curved or bentposition shown in FIG. 47H and the substantially flat position shown inFIG. 47I, the first flexible support structure 16 and the flexibledisplay 18 move (e.g., slide) independently of one another. When thearticle 10 is moved from the curved position (FIG. 47H) to thesubstantially flat position (FIG. 47I), the links 954 and the modules19A, 19B of the first flexible support structure 16 pivot accordinglyrelative to one another, the bellowed wall 964 expands (such that thecrests 978 move to a substantially flat position), and correspondingportions of the display 18 are forcibly slid further inward into thepockets 980, all while the first flexible support structure 16 and thedisplay 18 slide relative to one another within the cavity 972. When, onthe other hand, the article 10 is moved from the substantially flatposition (FIG. 47I) to the curved position (FIG. 47H), the links 954 andthe modules 19A, 19B of the first flexible support structure 16 pivotaccordingly relative to one another, the bellowed wall 964 contracts(such that the crests 978 move to a substantially curved or archedposition), and corresponding portions of the display 18 are forciblydriven at least partially out of the pockets 980, all while the firstflexible support structure 16 and the display 18 slide relative to oneanother within the cavity 972.

Because the flexible support 16 is movably coupled to or with theflexible electronic display 18 in this way, the arrangement illustratedin FIGS. 47G-47I does not alter the central bending or neutral plane ofthe flexible electronic display 18, thereby substantially maintainingthe bending ability (e.g., the bending range) of the display 18. Inother words, such an arrangement leaves the article 10 with a bendingrange that is substantially similar to the bending range of the flexibleelectronic display 18 itself.

In other examples, the article 10 can vary from the one illustrated inFIGS. 47G-47I. The flexible support structure 16 can, for example, varyin shape (e.g., the flexible support structure 16 need not have asubstantially rectangular-shape) and/or vary in size. The flexiblesupport structure 16 can, for example, include only one electronicsmodule 16 (e.g., disposed where the module 19B is), instead of twomodules 19A, 19B, that contains all of the necessary electronicscomponents. The position of the two modules 19A, 19B can also vary(e.g., the two modules 19A, 19B can be positioned on the sides of thesupport structure 16). Alternatively or additionally, the flexiblesupport structure 950, particularly the housing 962, can vary in shapeand/or size. The bellowed wall 964 can, for example, include roots 976attached to the support structure 16 in a different manner (e.g., in adifferent location) and/or crests 978 having more or less curvature. Thesidewalls 968 can, for example, be angled more or less relative to thebottom wall 964. The sidewalls 968 can, for example, include retainingportions (similar to the retaining portions 758 described above) thatcontact a top surface of the flexible display 18 to retain the flexibledisplay 18 within the flexible support structure 950. Further yet, thedisplay 18 can be disposed over or on the sidewalls 968 instead of beingdisposed therebetween. As noted above, it will also be appreciated thatthe flexible electronic display 18 can take the form of a differentflexible electronic component, such as, for example, a sensor tag, aflexible OLED light, a flexible electronic circuit, or a collapsiblee-reader.

FIGS. 47J-47L illustrate yet another dynamically flexible, attachablearticle 10 that is substantially identical to the article 10 illustratedin FIGS. 47G-47I, with common reference numerals indicative of commoncomponents. However, unlike the article 10 illustrated in FIGS. 47G-47I,the article 10 illustrated in FIGS. 47J-47L includes a plurality ofslots 1000 formed in the first flexible support structure 16 and aplurality of pins 1004 slidably disposed in those slots 1000,respectively. In the depicted version, the article 10 includes six slots1000 and thus can be said to include six sliding areas. As illustratedin FIG. 47K, two of the slots 1000 are formed adjacent the electronicsmodule 19A, two of the slots 1000 are formed adjacent the electronicsmodule 19B, and two of the slots 1000 are formed adjacent the clasp 952.

As illustrated in FIG. 47K, each slot 1000 has a substantially ovalshape. The slots 1000 generally accommodate the length differencebetween the flexible display 18 and the flexible support structure 16.Each slot 1000 defines a first stop surface 1008A and a second stopsurface 1008B that together define or correspond to the permissiblebending range for the article 10 (i.e., the slots 1000 help to limitbending of the article 10 and at the same time accommodate the pathlength difference between the flexible support structure 16 and theflexible display 18 when the article is bent. The first stop surface1008A defines or corresponds to the most extreme local bending that willbe permitted when the article 10 is bent in an outward direction, whichin this case is illustrated in FIG. 47K (though this position need notalways be the most extreme). The second stop surface 1008B correspondsto the substantially flat position illustrated in FIG. 47L, with theresult that the article 10 cannot be bent in the inward direction beyondthe illustrated substantially flat position. In other examples, thesecond stop surface 1008B can correspond to a different position of thearticle 10, with the result that some bending of the article 10 in theinward direction is tolerated. In any event, each pin 1004 is slidablydisposed between the first stop surface 1008A and the second stopsurface 1008B of a respective slot 1000.

The slots 1000 and the pins 1004 thus operate to help facilitate acontrolled bending of the article 10, but also pivotally and slidablyconnect some of the links 954 of the first flexible support structure16. Accordingly, when the article 10 is moved between the curved or bentposition shown in FIG. 47K and the substantially flat position shown inFIG. 47L, the pins 1004 are configured to slide within the slots 1000,respectively, such that the slidably connected links 954 slide toward oraway from one another. When the article 10 is moved from the curvedposition (FIG. 47K) to the substantially flat position (FIG. 47L), thepins 1004 slide away from the first stop surfaces 1008A and toward thesecond stop surfaces 1008B, thereby causing portions of the slidablyconnected links 954 to slide away from one another and increasing alength of the first flexible support structure 16. When, on the otherhand, the article 10 is moved from the substantially flat position (FIG.47L) to the curved position (FIG. 47K), the pins 1004 slide away fromthe second stop surfaces 1008B and toward the first stop surfaces 1008A,thereby causing portions of the slidably connected links 954 to slidetoward one another and decreasing the length of the first flexiblesupport structure 16. In this manner, the slots 1000 and the pins 1004help to facilitate a controlled movement of the article 10 and alsofacilitate movement of the first flexible support structure 16 relativeto the display 18 (and vice-versa).

In other examples, the slots 1000 can vary. For example, the slots 1000can have a different shape (e.g., an elliptical shape) and/or adifferent size (e.g., the slots 1000 can be longer or shorter, therebypermitting more or less bending). As another example, the article 10 caninclude more or less slots 1000 and thus can include more or lesssliding areas. Although not explicitly illustrated herein, it will beappreciated that it is not necessary to utilize the pockets 980 incombination with the slots 1000 and the pins 1004. Both servesubstantially the same purpose, such that alternative articles 1000 mayinclude only the pockets 980 (as illustrated in FIGS. 47G-47I) or onlyinclude the slots 1000 and the pins 1004.

In some implementations, a mobile device, such as an attachable orwearable device, may include various flexible electronic componentsdisposed on more than one surface of the mobile device. A user of themobile device may selectively utilize the various flexible electroniccomponents by exposing certain surfaces of the mobile device, bendingthe mobile device to certain positions, etc. For example, the mobiledevice may include an electronic display or light array on one surfaceand an energy generating component (e.g., including solar panels) onanother surface of the mobile device. In the case of the mobile devicebeing a wearable device, a user may attach the device to the user's bodywith the electronic display or light array facing up (i.e., away fromthe user's body) to utilize the electronic display or light array. Thena user may “flip” the device over (e.g., by detaching the device andbending the device in an opposite direction), expose the energygenerating component, and re-attach the device to utilize the energygenerating component.

A wearable computing or communication device or wearable article, suchas a smartwatch or other bracelet-type device, may integrate flexibleelectronic components on multiple surfaces, as discussed herein. Forexample, a flexible wristband or smartwatch integrating multipleflexible electronic components may integrate a flexible electronicdisplay on one surface (e.g., a “top” of a device) and while alsointegrating an energy generating component on another surface (e.g., a“bottom” of the device). Generally, however, it is understood that anytype of wearable or non-wearable computing, communication, or othermobile device, may integrate flexible electronic components disposed onmultiple surfaces, as discussed herein.

FIG. 48A is a perspective view of an example flexible, attachablearticle 2100, such as a smartwatch or bracelet-type computing orcommunication device. The article 2100 integrates a first flexibleelectronic component on a first surface 2102 of the article 2100 and asecond flexible electronic component on a second surface 2104 of thearticle 2100. The first flexible electronic component may include aflexible display 2106 and the second flexible electronic component mayinclude one or more solar panels 2108. FIG. 48B is a perspective view ofanother side of the example article 2100.

Content, such as images, data, maps, calendars, social mediainformation, etc., may be displayed on a flexible display 2106 at ornear a surface 2102 of the article 2100. The article may also includethe touch interface (not shown) to allow a user to interact with theflexible display by touching the surface 2102. The solar panels 2108 maygenerate energy, when exposed to sunlight, to at least partially powerthe flexible display 2106, charge one or more batteries (not shown), orpower other electronic components of the article 2100.

In some implementations, the article 2100 may utilize a flexible displayas described in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/920,705(Attorney Docket No. 32187/48483P), filed Dec. 24, 2013, and entitled“DYNAMICALLY FLEXIBLE, ATTACHABLE DEVICE HAVING AN INTEGRAL FLEXIBLEDISPLAY,” a touchscreen interface as described in U.S. ProvisionalPatent Application No. 61/981,132 (Attorney Docket No. 32187/48471P),filed Apr. 17, 2014, and entitled “INFRARED TOUCH SYSTEM FOR FLEXIBLEDISPLAYS,” and/or a support structure component as described in U.S.Provisional Patent Application No. 61/946,412 (Attorney Docket No.32187/47980P), filed Feb. 28, 2014, and entitled “SUPPORT STRUCTURE FORA FLEXIBLE DISPLAY COMPONENT,” the disclosures of which are herebyexpressly incorporated by reference herein. Also, the article 2100 mayutilize any number of the flexible displays and/or other flexibleelectronic components described herein.

FIGS. 48C and 48D are other perspective views of the article 2100 bentor flexed into shape to be utilized as a bracelet or watch type device.To this end, the article 2100 may include any suitable number oflatches, buttons, Velcro attachments, etc. as further discussed in U.S.Provisional Patent Application 61/003,549, filed May 28, 2014 andentitled “FLEXIBLE ELECTRONIC COMPONENT MOVABLY COUPLED TO A FLEXIBLESUPPORT,” the disclosure of which is hereby expressly incorporated byreference herein. Further, the latches, buttons, etc. may be configuredso as to allow the article to be selectively bent or flexed into abracelet/watch shape with either electronic display 2106 or the solarpanels 2108 on the outer peripheral of the article 2100. That is, in onescenario, a user of the article may attach the article to the user'swrist with the electronic display 2106 facing outward and the solarpanels 2108 against the body of the user. However, in another scenario,the user of the article may attach the article to the user's wrist withthe solar panels 2108 facing outward and the electronic display 2106against the body of the user. In this manner, a user may selectivelyposition the article 2100 to primarily operate one of the electronicdisplay 2106 or the solar panels 2108, as a primary operating component,in an implementation.

The article 2100 may include an electronics module 2110 disposed betweenone or more ends of the surface 2104 (as shown in FIG. 48D) and holdselectronics, such as processors, memories, sensors, batteries, displaydrivers, etc. that are used to power and drive the touch interface andthe flexible display 2106 and to control the solar panels 2108. It willbe appreciated that the electronics module 2110 can be positionedelsewhere in other examples, such as, for example, at other locations onthe surface 2102 or between one or more ends of the surface 2102. Ifdesired, the components of the electronics module 2110 can be sealed orotherwise protected from water, air, dirt, etc. to which the exterior ofthe article 2100 is exposed. For example, any or all of these electroniccomponents may be encapsulated in a hermetically sealed manner toprevent any direct exposure of these components to exterior forces andenvironmental hazards. Further details of example electronics modules,which may be implemented as the electronics module 210, are discussedwith reference to FIG. 65.

Although an article or device, such as a wearable device, may include aflexible display on one surface and a power generating component (e.g.,including solar panels) on another surface, articles or devicesdiscussed herein may include any types of flexible electronic componentson multiple surfaces and may include more than two flexible electroniccomponents. For example, a wearable device may integrate any combinationof flexible electronic components including light arrays (e.g., arraysof LED lights), cameras, biometric sensors (e.g., heart rate monitors orblood pressure monitors), motion sensors, kinematic sensors (gyroscopes,accelerometers, etc.), computer-readable media, etc. disposed onmultiple surfaces (two, three, four, etc. surfaces) of the wearabledevice. Further, although the article 2100 depicts the flexibleelectronic components 2106 and 2108 covering approximately equal surfaceareas on either side of the article 2100, an article may include aflexible electronic component on one side of the article of a differentsize and shape as compared to a flexible electronic component disposedon another side of the article. Flexible electronic components may, insome cases, cover an area up to one of more edges of a surface on whichthey are disposed. In other cases, flexible electronic components mayonly cover a portion of a surface of a device with some non-coveredarea, or border, between the flexible electronic components and an edgeof the device.

FIGS. 49A and 49B illustrate example article 2200 integrating an arrayof lights 2202 (e.g., LEDs) on a first surface 2204 and a powergenerating component 2206 (e.g., including solar panels) and a secondsurface 2208. In some implementations, the array of lights 2202 may be,at least partially, powered by energy generated from the powergenerating component 2206. For example, the power generating component2206, when operating, may generate energy that is stored in a battery(e.g., of an electronics module). Then, when the array of lights 2202operates, the array of lights 2202 may receive power from the batteryvia any suitable combination of electronic leads and power conditioningcomponents.

FIG. 50 illustrates an example utilization (e.g., by a user) of multipleflexible electronic components disposed on multiple surfaces of anexample wearable device 2300. The wearable device 2300 may, for example,integrate flexible electronic components as discussed further withreference to FIGS. 48A, 48B, 48C, and 48D.

In an example scenario, a user may be operating a flexible display 2302of the wearable device 2300 while the wearable device 2300 is bent orflexed to a position 2304. In the position 2304 the flexible display2302 may be disposed on a surface of the wearable device 2300 so as tobe on or near an outer peripheral of the wearable device 2300. Asillustrated in FIG. 50, the position 2304 may allow a user to attach thewearable device 2300 to the user's wrist as a bracelet- or watch-typedevice so as to view images displayed on the flexible display 2302. Forexample, the flexible display 2302 (e.g., controlled by an electronicsmodule 2306) may display images, times, weather information, calendarappointments, emails, text messages, etc., as further discussed below.

While flexed or bent to the position 2304, another flexible electronicscomponent disposed on another surface of the wearable device 2300, suchas the power generating component 2308 (e.g., including one or moresolar panels), may not be exposed. That is, the power generatingcomponent may be disposed on a surface of the wearable device 2300 thatis against the body of the user (i.e., in back of the flexible display2302). In such a case, the electronics module 2306 may control the powergenerating component 2308 and/or other flexible electronic components tobe in a sleep, hibernate, or other low-power or non-active state whilethe flexible display 2302 is active. Thus, in the position 2304, theflexible display 2302 may operate as a primary operating component, inan implementation.

At certain times or to select certain functionality of the wearabledevice 2300, a user of the wearable device 2300 may flex or bend thewearable device 2300 from the position 2302 to another position 2310, asillustrated by the one or more intermediate positions 2312.Specifically, in an implementation, a user may: (i) detach the wearabledevice 2300 from the body of the user (e.g., a wrist); (ii) “flip” thedevice over, as illustrated by the intermediate positions 2312 in FIG.50, or otherwise adjust the orientation of the wearable device 2300; and(iii) re-attach (e.g., via one or more latches, buttons, etc.) thewearable device 2300 in the position 2310 with the power generatingcomponent 2308 on an outer peripheral of the wearable device 2300.

In this manner, a user of the wearable device 2300 may expose the powergenerating component 2308 so as to operate, or allow an electronicmodule 2306 to control, the power generating component 2308 as a primaryoperating component of the wearable device 2300. That is, when in theposition 2310, the electronics module 2306 may control the flexibledisplay 2302 and/or other flexible electronic components to be in asleep, hibernate, or other low-power or non-active state while the powergenerating component 2308 is active.

By way of example, a user may perform the process illustrated in FIG. 50to selectively perform certain functions facilitated by the flexibledisplay 2302 and the power generating component 2308. A user may flex orbend the wearable device 2300 to the position 2304 to view digitalcontent (e.g., images) via the flexible display 2302, and a user mayflex or bend the wearable device 2300 to the position 2310 to generatepower via the power generating component 2308. In one scenario, the usermay view images on the flexible display 2302 (while the wearable deviceis in the position 2304) until a charge of a battery powering theflexible display 2302 runs low. The user may then perform the processillustrated in FIG. 50 to expose the power generating component 2308 andallow the power generating component 2308 to generate power (e.g., oneor more solar cells) to re-charge the battery.

FIGS. 51A and 51B illustrate applications of another example wearabledevice 2400 which may integrate flexible electronic components onmultiple surfaces of the wearable device 2400 as further discussed withreference to FIGS. 49A and 49B. In the position 2402 an array of lights2404 may be disposed on a surface of the wearable device 2400 so as tobe on or near on outer peripheral of the wearable device 2400. Asillustrated in FIG. 51A, the position 2402 may allow a user to attachthe wearable device 2400 to the user's head (e.g., via one or more bandsor clasps) as a headband or head mounted device so as to utilize thearray of lights 2404 as a head lamp. For example, a user may attach thewearable device 2400 in the position 2402 to illuminate a walking,hiking, biking, or other path.

As with the example wearable device 2300, a user may flex or bend thewearable device 2400 to another position 2406 (as illustrated in FIG.51B) to selectively perform other functions facilitated by a powergenerating component 2408 on another surface of the wearable device2400. A user may flex or bend the wearable device 2400 to the position2402 during night or in another dark environment to allow the array oflights 2404 to illuminate a path, and a user may flex or bend thewearable device 2400 to the position 2406 to allow the power generatingcomponent 2408 to generate power. The flexible electronic componentsdisposed on multiple surfaces of the wearable device 2400 may providefunctionalities that are useful at different times. Thus, a user mayposition a wearable device to allow the wearable device to provide aspecific functionality that is relevant to a current time (displayingimages, illuminating a path, charging a battery, etc.), in animplementation.

To prevent flexible electronic components disposed on multiple surfacesof a device/article (e.g., the flexible display 2106 and the solarpanels 2108) from being bent or curved beyond minimum critical bendingradii, but at the same time substantially maintain the bending abilityof the flexible electronic components, the article 2100 can, in somecases, include a flexible support that is movably (e.g., slidably)coupled with or to the flexible electronic components. In particular theflexible support may be coupled with or to the flexible electroniccomponents in a manner that allows the flexible support and the flexibleelectronic components to move (e.g., slide) relative to or independentlyof one another when the article 2100 is moved between differentpositions (e.g., between a substantially flat position and a bentposition). Examples of different arrangements are described inconnection with FIGS. 52A, 52B, 53A, 53B, 54A, 54B, 55A, 55B, 56A, 56B,57A, 57B, 58A, 58B, 58C, and 58D. While these arrangements are generallydescribed as including a flexible display and a secondary electroniccomponent, it will be appreciated that these arrangements can includeany number of combinations of different types of flexible electroniccomponents (a flexible electronic circuit, a sensor tag, a flexible OLEDlight, a solar panel, a light array, etc.) including combinations withmore than two flexible electronic components. Further, although article2100 is referred to below for ease of discussion, any of the articles2100, 2200, 2300, or 2400 or substantially similar articles integratingflexible electronic components on multiple surfaces may utilize thearrangements are described in connection with FIGS. 52A, 52B, 53A, 53B,54A, 54B, 55A, 55B, 56A, 56B, 57A, 57B, 58A, 58B, 58C, and 58D.

Generally speaking, because flexible electronic components (e.g., theflexible display 2106 and the solar panels 2108) and the flexiblesupport are movable independently of one another, the amount of strainthat the flexible support places on the flexible electronic components(e.g., the flexible display 2106 and the solar panels 2108) when thearticle 2100 is being bent or curved is minimized as these structures donot alter or only minimally alter the neutral plane of the flexibleelectronic component (e.g., the flexible display 2106 and the solarpanels 2108). This feature, in turn, minimizes the minimum criticalbending radius of each of the flexible electronic components whencoupled to the flexible support.

Advantageously, in some of these cases, the flexible support can beremovably coupled to the flexible electronic components (e.g., theflexible display 2106 and the solar panels 2108) so that the flexiblesupport can be separated from the flexible electronic components. Inturn, one or more of the flexible electronic components can be easilyand quickly placed and associated with any number of different objects,items, or devices, such as, for example, a coffee cup, a phone case, acharging stand, or a different flexible support. In the latter case, theflexible support can be removed and interchanged with a differentflexible support selected from one or more different flexible supports.This plurality of different flexible supports can include, for example,flexible supports made of a different material (e.g., leather, plastic,cloth), having a different texture (e.g., smooth, perforated), made ofone or more different colors (e.g., brown, black, white, etc.),associated with a different style, or any combinations of thesefeatures. In this manner, the flexible support, and, more generally, theflexible attachable article 2100, can be customizable. It will beappreciated that, in the same manner, the flexible electronic componentscan be removed from the flexible support and the flexible support can beinterchanged or connected to a different flexible electronic componentsselected from one or more different flexible components. The differentflexible components can include, for example, one or more differenttypes of flexible components (e.g., different flexible displays 18, oneor more OLED lights, one or more sensor tags, etc.), flexible componentsmade of one or more different materials, flexible components havingdifferent thicknesses, etc., or combinations thereof. In this manner,the flexible electronic component (e.g., the flexible display 18), and,more generally, the flexible attachable article 10, can be customizable.

FIGS. 52A and 52B illustrate a dynamically flexible, attachable article2500, again in the form of a wristband, that includes a flexible supportstructure 2502, a flexible electronic component in the form of aflexible electronic display 2504, and a secondary electronic component2506 (e.g., an energy generating component such as a component includingone or more solar panels). The flexible electronic display 2504 and thesecondary electronic component 2506 of the example article 2500 aremovably disposed within the flexible support structure 2502. The article2500 also includes a mechanical support component 2508 fixedly attachedto the flexible support structure 2502. Though not expressly illustratedherein, the article 2500 can include one or more connectors describedherein, such as, for example, the connectors illustrated in FIGS. 1-24,and/or any of the other connectors described herein.

The flexible support structure 2502 and the mechanical support component2508 are generally configured to provide support to the flexibleelectronic display 2504 and the secondary electronic component 2506. Theflexible support structure 2502 can be made of any suitable flexiblesuitable material such as, for example, cloth, leather, plastic, metal,or other material. As illustrated in FIGS. 52A and 52B, the flexiblesupport structure 2502 in this example has or is defined by a pair oflongitudinally-extending, elongated walls 2510 a and 2510 b. Further,for each of the walls 2510 a and 2510 b, the flexible support structure2502 includes a pair of opposing sidewalls 2512 a and 2512 b that extendupward, at an angle substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis2514, from a longitudinally-extending perimeter edge of the walls 2510 aand 2510 b.

As illustrated in FIG. 52B, a lubricant 2516 (e.g., oil, graphite, PTFE)can be disposed on (e.g., applied to) the walls 2510 a and 2510 b, orportions thereof, to facilitate movement between the support structure2502 and the flexible electronic display 2504 and/or the secondaryelectronic component 2506. The flexible support structure 2502 furtherhas a retaining portions 2518 a and 2518 b that extend laterally inwardfrom a top portion of the opposing sidewalls 2512 a and 2512 b,respectively, such that the retaining portions 2518 a and 2518 b hangover the walls 2510 a and 2510 b of the support structure 2502.Together, the walls 2510 a and 2510 b, the sidewalls 2512 a and 2512 b,and the retaining portions 2518 a and 2518 b define a cavities 2520 aand 2520 b sized to support and receive the flexible electronic display2504 and/or the secondary electronic component 2506, respectively,therein. As illustrated in FIG. 52B, the cavities 2520 a and 2520 b havea substantially rectangular-shape in cross-section.

The mechanical support component 2508 may be fixedly disposed in and/oradhered to a slot or channel within the flexible support structure 2502.The mechanical support component 2508 and a corresponding slot in theflexible support structure 2502 may extend between one end 2522 a of theflexible support structure 2502 and the other end 2522 b of the flexiblesupport structure 2502. The mechanical support component 2508 is, inthis example, made of a second flexible material that has a different(e.g., higher) Young's Modulus (i.e., is less elastic or more rigid)than the flexible support component 2502. The mechanical supportcomponent 2508 can, for example, be made from cloth, rubber, leather,nylon, plastic (e.g., PTFE), and/or any other suitable flexible materialdifferent from a material used to construct the flexible supportcomponent 2502. Generally, flexible support structure 2502 is moreelastic, or less stiff, than the mechanical support component 2508. Infact, in some cases, the flexible support structure 2502 can besignificantly more elastic than the mechanical support component 2508and can be highly elastic or bendable.

The mechanical support component 2508 can be retained within theflexible support structure 2502 (if desired) via friction, and may, ifdesired, be secured at, for example, one point in the slot, usingadhesive (e.g., glue), or via some other manner. In any event, themechanical support component 2508, by virtue of being made from stiffermaterial than the flexible support structure 2502, provides somerigidity to the overall support structure for the flexible electronicdisplay 2504 and the secondary electronic component 2506, therebyproviding some support to the flexible electronic display 2504 and thesecondary electronic component 2506. Moreover, because the flexiblesupport structure 2502 is movably coupled to or with the flexibleelectronic display 2504 and the secondary electronic component 2506 (andvice-versa), the flexible electronic display 2504 and the secondaryelectronic component 2506 are movable relative to or independently ofthe flexible support structure 2502 (and vice-versa).

As illustrated in FIG. 52B, the flexible electronic display 2504 and thesecondary electronic component 2506 can be seated or disposed in thecavities 2520 a and 2520 b, respectively. In turn, the sidewalls 2512 aand 2512 b of the flexible support structure 2502 extend upward adjacentand in some cases above the edges of the flexible electronic display2504 and the secondary electronic component 2506, such that thesidewalls 2512 a and 2512 b can provide side impact protection for theflexible electronic display 2504 and the secondary electronic component2506, respectively. In addition, the retaining portions 2518 a and 2518b, which extend inward of the edges of the flexible electronic display2504 and the secondary electronic component 2506, can contact a surfaceof the flexible electronic display 2504 and the secondary electroniccomponent 2506 to prevent the flexible electronic display 2504 and thesecondary electronic component 2506 from exiting the flexible supportstructure 2502, thereby retaining the flexible electronic display 2504and the secondary electronic component 2506 within the flexible supportstructure 2502.

In this manner, the flexible electronic display 2504 and the secondaryelectronic component 2506 are slidably coupled with or to the flexiblesupport structure 2502 (and vice-versa), with the flexible electronicdisplay 2504 and the secondary electronic component 2506 being slidableindependently of or relative to the flexible support structure 2502 (andvice-versa). Accordingly, as the article 2500 is bent to form a circularor oval band, similar to the form illustrated in FIG. 48D, the flexibleelectronic display 2504 and the secondary electronic component 2506 moveindependently or relative to corresponding portions of the flexiblesupport structure 2502 (and vice-versa). In some implementationsutilizing lubricants, such as the lubricants 2516, the lubricants helpsto facilitate the movement between the flexible support structure 2502and the flexible electronic display 2504 and the secondary electroniccomponent 2506. At some point, the article 2500 can be bent to such adegree that the retaining portions 2518 a and 2518 b contactcorresponding portions of the flexible electronic display 2504 and thesecondary electronic component 2506. However, the support structure inthe walls 2510 a and 2510 b may limit the bending motion of the walls2510 a and 2510 b and, thus, limit the bending motion of the flexibleelectronic display 2504 and the secondary electronic component 2506 topredetermined minimal bending radii. At this point, the article 2500 hasreached its pre-defined bending limit and any further bending of thearticle 2500, particularly the flexible electronic display 2504 and thesecondary electronic component 2506 is prevented. Conversely, thearticle 2500 can be returned to the substantially flat position, asillustrated in FIGS. 48A and 48B, in a similar manner.

At the same time, because the flexible support 2502 is slidably coupledto or with the flexible electronic display 2504 and the secondaryelectronic component 2506, the arrangement illustrated in FIGS. 52A and52B may not alter the central bending or neutral plane of the flexibleelectronic display 2504 or the central bending or neutral plane of thesecondary electronic component 2506, thereby substantially maintainingthe bending ability (e.g., the bending range) of the flexible electronicdisplay 2504 and the secondary electronic component 2506. In otherwords, such an arrangement leaves the article 2500 with a bending rangethat is substantially similar to the bending range(s) of the flexibleelectronic display 2504 and/or the secondary electronic component 2506.

In other examples, the article 2500 can vary from the one illustrated inFIGS. 52A and 52B. The flexible support 2500 illustrated in FIGS. 52Aand 52B can vary in shape and/or size. The flexible support 2500 can,for example, be wider, thereby creating more space between: (i) thesidewalls 2512 a and 2512 b, and (ii) the flexible electronic display2504 and/or the secondary electronic component 2506. The sidewalls 2512a and 2512 b can, for example, be angled more or less relative to thewalls 2510 a and 2510 b. The retaining portions 2518 a and 2518 b can,for example, be constructed differently (e.g., can extend along only aportion of the length of the article 2500, can be angled more or lessrelative to the sidewalls 2512 a and 2512 b). The cavities 2520 a and2520 b can be of a different size (e.g., smaller, larger) and/or canhave a different shape in cross-section. As yet another example, theflexible support 2502 need not include the retaining portions 2518 a and2518 b. Instead, the flexible support 2502 can be slidably or otherwisemovably coupled with the flexible electronic display 2504 and/or thesecondary electronic component 2506 in a different way (e.g., usingangled sidewalls). The flexible electronic display 2504 and/or thesecondary electronic component 2506 can also take the form of adifferent flexible electronic component, such as, for example, a sensortag, a flexible OLED light, a flexible electronic circuit, or acollapsible e-reader.

Although FIGS. 52A and 52B illustrate an example article 2500 in whichflexible electronic components are slidably coupled to the supportstructure 2502 and a mechanical support component 2508 is fixedlycoupled to the support structure 2502, some implementations of articleshaving multiple flexible electronic components may include someelectronic components fixedly attached to a support structure and/ormechanical support components slidably attached to a support structure.FIGS. 53A and 53B illustrate one such example article. In particular,53A and 53B illustrate an attachable article 2600, again in the form ofa wristband. The article 2600 in this example again includes twoflexible electronic component disposed on multiple surfaces of thearticle 2600. Specifically, the article 2600 includes a flexible supportstructure 2602, a flexible electronic component in the form of aflexible electronic display 2604, and a secondary electronic component2606 (e.g., an energy generating component or an array of lights). Inthis article 2600, however, the flexible electronic display 2604 isfixedly attached to the flexible support structure 2602 while amechanical support component 2608, within the flexible support structure2602, is slidably coupled to the flexible support structure 2602. Thoughnot expressly illustrated herein, the article 2600 can also include oneor more connectors described herein, such as, for example, theconnectors illustrated in FIGS. 1-24, and/or any of the other connectorsdescribed herein.

As in the article 2500, the flexible electronic display 2604 and thesecondary electronic component 2606 may be seated or disposed incavities 2620 a and 2620 b of the flexible support structure 2602.However, as mentioned above, the flexible electronic display 2604 isfixedly attached to the flexible support structure 2602 (e.g., via glueor friction) within the cavity 2620 a, while the mechanical supportcomponent 2608 and the secondary electronic component 2606 are slidableindependent of or relative to the flexible support structure 2602 andthe flexible electronic display 2604. In some implementations,lubricants 2616 help to facilitate the movement between: (i) theflexible support structure 2602, and (ii) the mechanical supportcomponent 2608 and/or the secondary electronic component 2606.

Because the flexible support 2602 is slidably coupled to or with themechanical support component 2608 and the secondary electronic component2606, the arrangement illustrated in FIGS. 53A and 53B may not alter thecentral bending or neutral plane of the flexible electronic display 2604or the central bending or neutral plane of the secondary electroniccomponent 2606, thereby substantially maintaining the bending ability(e.g., the bending range) of the flexible electronic display 2604 andthe secondary electronic component 2606. In other words, such anarrangement leaves the article 2600 with a bending range that issubstantially similar to the bending range(s) of the flexible electronicdisplay 2604 and/or the secondary electronic component 2606. Such anarrangement may be desired, for example, when the article 2600 is to beconfigured with a bending range similar to that of the flexibleelectronic display 2604 and/or the secondary electronic component 2606,and the bending range of the mechanical support component 2808 is lessof a concern. That is, the secondary electronic component 2606 may drivethe bendability constraints of the article 2600, while the mechanicalsupport component 2608 is fixedly attached to the flexible supportstructure 2602 to conform to these bendability constraints. In othercases, when the flexible support structure 2602 has a flexibility thatis very high compared to the flexible electronic display 2604, theneutral plane of the flexible electronic display 2604 is notsubstantially altered by being adhered to the flexible support structure2602.

Generally, articles having a plurality of flexible electronic componentsdisposed on multiple surfaces and having various mechanical supportcomponents may include any suitable combination of fixed and slidingattachments of the flexible electronic components and/or mechanicalsupport components to a flexible support structure. For example, anarticle may include an arrangement in which a secondary electroniccomponent (e.g., an energy generating component) is fixedly attached toa flexible support structure while a flexible electronic display and amechanical support component are slidably attached to the flexiblesupport structure. In another example, an article may include threeflexible electronic components, two of which are slidably attached to aflexible support structure and one of which is fixedly attached to aflexible support structure, and may include two mechanical supportcomponents, one of which is slidably attached to a flexible supportstructure and one of which is fixedly attached to a flexible supportstructure. More generally, articles may include any suitable number offlexible electronic components slidably/fixedly attached to a flexiblesupport structure and any suitable number of mechanical supportcomponents slidably/flexibly attached to the flexible support structureso as to conform to bendability constraints of one or more of theflexible electronic components and/or to conform to bendabilityrequirements of a product. In many embodiments, however, articlesinclude one electronic component being adhered to a flexible supportstructure while other electronic components are free to flex and/orslide.

Further, although FIGS. 52A, 52B, 53A, and 53B illustrate flexibleelectronic components on exterior surfaces of article, some articles mayinclude flexible electronic components disposed on interior surfaces.FIGS. 54A and 54B illustrate one example of such an article. Inparticular, 54A and 54B illustrate an attachable article 2700, again inthe form of a wristband. The article 2700 in this example again includestwo flexible electronic component disposed on multiple surfaces of thearticle 2700. Specifically, the article 2700 includes a flexible supportstructure 2702, a flexible electronic component in the form of aflexible electronic display 2704, and a secondary electronic component2706 (e.g., an energy generating component or an array of lights or aflexible electronics circuit). In this article 2700, the secondaryflexible electronic component 2706 is disposed in a slot within theflexible support structure 2702 while a mechanical support component2708 is disposed on an exterior surface or within an exterior cavity ofthe article 2700. Though not expressly illustrated herein, the article2700 can also include one or more connectors described herein, such as,for example, the connectors illustrated in FIGS. 1-24, and/or any of theother connectors described herein.

This arrangement, illustrated in FIGS. 54A and 54B, may allow thesecondary electronic component 2706 to be positioned behind the flexibleelectronic display 2704. For example, the secondary electronic component2706 may include a light array configured to backlight the flexibleelectronic display 2704. In another example, the secondary electroniccomponent 2706 may be a touch sensor to sense pressure from an objectthat touches the surface of the flexible electronic display 2704. Inthese cases the secondary electronic component 2706 and/or the flexibleelectronic display 2704 may be slidably or fixedly attached to theflexible support structure 2702, as further discussed with reference toFIGS. 52A, 52B, 53A, and 53B. Further, although not illustrated in FIGS.54A and 54B, the flexible support structure 2702 may include any numberof gaps, holes, windows, etc. between the secondary electronic component2706 and/or the flexible electronic display 2704 to facilitate touchsensor, backlighting, etc. functionality.

Generally, any types of flexible electronic components may be disposedbehind other flexible electronic components and/or within flexiblesupport structures of articles. For example, an array of lights may bedisposed on an exterior surface of an article and a flexible electronicdisplay may disposed behind the array of light such that the array oflights frontlights the flexible electronic display.

FIGS. 55A and 55B illustrate yet another dynamically flexible,attachable article 2800, again in the form of a wristband, that issubstantially similar to the article 2100 illustrated in FIGS. 48A, 48B,48C, and 48D. The article 2800 in this case includes a flexible supportstructure 2802, a flexible electronic component in the form of aflexible electronic display 2804, a secondary electronic component 2806,and a mechanical support component 2808. The flexible electronic display2804 and the secondary electronic component 2806 may be movably disposedwithin the flexible support structure 2802. The article 2800 alsoincludes a horizontal or longitudinal axis 2810. Unlike the articles2500, 2600, and 2700 illustrated in FIGS. 52A, 52B, 53A, 53B, 54A, and54B, the article 2800 illustrated in this example further includes aflexible or bendable and transparent sheets of material 2812 a and 2812b disposed on the support structure 2802 and over the flexibleelectronic display 2804 and the secondary electronic component 2806,respectively. Though not expressly illustrated herein, the article 2800can also include one or more connectors described herein, such as, forexample, the connectors illustrated in FIGS. 1-24, and/or any of theother connectors described herein.

The flexible sheets 2812 a and 2812 b illustrated in FIG. 55A have asubstantially rectangular shape similar to the shape of the flexiblesupport structure 2802, the flexible electronic component 2804, and thesecondary electronic component 2806. The sheets 2812 a and 2812 b inthis example have a width that is larger than a width of the flexibleelectronic component 2804, and the secondary electronic component 2806and that is substantially equal to the width of the flexible supportstructure 2802. The sheets 2812 a and 2812 b are a generally transparentlayer, such that image content provided on the display 2804 is viewablethrough the sheet 2812 a and/or light or other radiation is able to passthrough the sheet 2812 b and impact the secondary electronic component2806. The sheets 2812 a and 2812 b can be made of any suitable flexibleor bendable material, such as, for example, plastic (e.g., acrylic),glass (e.g., Plexiglass), and/or any other flexible material(s). Thoughnot illustrated herein, an anti-reflective coating can, in some cases,be applied to the sheets 2812 a and 2812 b to optimize the optimalperformance of the article 2800.

The flexible support structure 2802 and the mechanical support component2808 are generally configured to provide support to the flexibleelectronic component 2804 and the secondary electronic component 2806,as discussed further with reference to FIGS. 52A and 52B. As illustratedin FIGS. 55A and 55B, the flexible support structure 2802 has or isdefined by a longitudinally-extending, elongate walls 2814 a and 2814 b.Further, the flexible support structure include, for each of the walls2814 a and 2814 b, a pair of opposing sidewalls 2816 a and 2816 b thatextend upward from a longitudinally-extending perimeter edge of thewalls 2814 a and 2814 b. Though not illustrated herein, a lubricant(e.g., oil, graphite, PTFE) can be disposed on (e.g., applied to) thewalls 2814 a and 2814 b, or portions thereof, to facilitate the movementdescribed below between: (i) the support structure 2802, and (ii) theflexible electronic display 2804 and/or the secondary electroniccomponent 2806. Together, the walls 2814 a and 2814 b and the sidewalls2816 a and 2816 b define cavities 2818 a and 2818 b sized to support andreceive the flexible electronic display 2804 and secondary electroniccomponent 2806, respectively, therein. As illustrated in FIG. 55B, thecavities 2818 a and 2818 b have a substantially rectangular-shape incross-section. Each sidewall 2816 a and 2816 b has an exposed portion2820 a and 2820 b sized to support and receive corresponding portions ofthe layers 2812 a and 2812 b thereon.

Although FIGS. 52A, 52B, 53A, 53B, 54A, 54B, 55A, and 55B illustrateflexible electronic components and mechanical support components thatare disposed within or on cavities or slots of a flexible supportstructure, some implementations of articles including multiple flexibleelectronic components may include flexible electronic componentsattached or adhered to other flexible electronic components and/ormechanical support components (as opposed to a flexible supportstructure). FIGS. 56A and 56B illustrate an example of one such article.In particular, 56A and 56B illustrate an attachable article 2900, againin the form of a wristband. The article 2900 in this example againincludes two flexible electronic components disposed on multiplesurfaces of the article 2900. Specifically, the article 2900 includes aflexible support structure 2902, a flexible electronic component in theform of a flexible electronic display 2904, and a secondary electroniccomponent 2906 (e.g., an energy generating component or an array oflights). In contrast to the example articles 2500, 2600, 2700, and 2800,the flexible electronic component 2904 and a mechanical supportcomponent 2908 are adhered to one another, possibly with a interlayer(e.g., form, not shown) in between the flexible electronic component2904 and a mechanical support component 2908. Though not expresslyillustrated herein, the article 2900 can also include one or moreconnectors described herein, such as, for example, the connectorsillustrated in FIGS. 1-24, and/or any of the other connectors describedherein.

The secondary electronic component 2906 may be slidably coupled to theflexible support structure 2902 within a cavity 2910, as furtherdiscussed with reference to FIGS. 52A and 52B. On the other hand, theflexible electronic display 2904 may be fixedly adhered to themechanical support component 2908 (via an interlayer, glue, etc.), andthe assembly of the flexible electronic display 2904 and the mechanicalsupport component 2908 may be adhered (e.g., via glue and/or anotherinterlayer) to the flexible support structure 2902. The flexibleelectronic display 2904 and the mechanical support component 2908 may bemounted or adhered to one another, along with an interlayer, asdescribed in greater detail below. Further, the flexible electronicdisplay 2904, the mechanical support component 2908, and one or moreinterlayers of the article 2900 may be assembled, or adhered together,using some or all of the mounting techniques described in U.S.Provisional Patent Application 61/971,100, filed March 27 and entitled“OPTIMAL MOUNTING OF A FLEXIBLE DISPLAY,” the disclosure of which ishereby expressly incorporated by reference herein. In particular, theflexible electronic display 2904 and the mechanical support component2908 may be mounted or adhered to one another such that the neutralbending plane 2912 of the flexible electronic display 2904 is minimallymodified or selectively modified by the assembly process. In otherembodiments, the mechanical support structure 2908 is constructed suchthat, when adhered to the display, the mechanical support structure 2908does not alter the neutral plane of the display.

In addition to being assembled together as discussed above, someimplementations of the article 2900 may include implementations of theflexible electronic display 2904 where the flexible electronic display2904 is formed by multiple (e.g., ten) segmented patches. That is, theflexible electronic display 2904 itself may be made up of multiplelaterally segmented patches, which patches are adhered to the mechanicalsupport component 2908 (and possibly an interlayer). Such an assembly ofthe flexible electronic display 2904 may allow for expansion orcompression during bending of the flexible electronic display 2904without a need for sliding of the flexible electronic display 2904independent of the mechanical support component 2908 and/or the flexiblesupport structure 2902. In these implementations, the multiple segmentedpatches may be coupled to one another electronically (e.g., via variouselectronic leads) and/or physically (e.g., via glue or other linkages).

Moreover, any of the example articles 2100, 2200, 2300, 2400, 2500,2600, 2700, 2800, or 2900 integrating multiple flexible electroniccomponents may include various components configured to promote slidingof flexible electronic components, keep flexible electronic componentstaut, maintain certain positions of flexible electronic componentsrelative to ends of flexible support structures, etc. FIGS. 57A, 57B,58A, 58B, 58C, and 58D illustrate at least some examples of suchcomponents.

FIGS. 57A and 57B illustrate a dynamically flexible, attachable article3000, again in the form of a wristband, that includes a flexible supportstructure 3002, a flexible electronic component in the form of aflexible electronic display 3004, and a secondary electronic component3006 (e.g., an energy generating component such as a component includingone or more solar panels). The flexible electronic display 3004 and thesecondary electronic component 3006 of the example article 3000 aremovably disposed within cavities 3010 a and 3010 b of the flexiblesupport structure 3002, as further discussed with reference to FIGS. 52Aand 52B. The article 3000 also includes a mechanical support component3008 fixedly attached to the flexible support structure 3002 and aspring element 3012. Though not expressly illustrated herein, thearticle 3000 can include one or more connectors described herein, suchas, for example, the connectors illustrated in FIGS. 1-24, and/or any ofthe other connectors described herein.

The flexible electronic display 3004 can generally take the form of anyof the displays described herein or a different display consistent withany of the embodiments described herein. As illustrated in FIG. 57B,when the article 3000 is in a substantially flat position, the flexibledisplay 3004 is shorter than the flexible support structure 3002, thoughthis need not be the case (e.g., the display 3004 and the support 3002can have the same length).

The spring element 3012 is provided to apply tension to one end of theflexible electronic display 3004. This applied tension facilitates thesliding movement between the flexible support structure 3002 and theflexible electronic display 3004 and helps to keep the electronicdisplay 3004 taut (i.e., in a substantially flat configuration) at alltimes. In the illustrated example, the spring element 3012 is asubstantially flat spring having a first end and a second end oppositethe first end. In other examples, the spring element 3012 can be adifferent type of spring (e.g., a coil spring, a leaf spring, elasticfabric, etc.) or take a different form and yet still be suited for theintended purpose. For example, the spring element 3012 can take the formof a small cylinder with an axle disposed therethrough. As anotherexample, the spring element 3012 can take the form of a mechanicalslider.

As illustrated in FIG. 57B, the spring element 3012 is coupled to aportion of the flexible support structure 3002 and coupled to a portionof the flexible electronic display 3004 at one end of the flexibleelectronic display 3004. Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 57A and57B, an end of the spring element 3012 may fixedly attached (e.g.,adhered) to a portion of the support structure 3002, and another end maybe fixedly attached (e.g., adhered) to a bottom surface of the flexibledisplay 3004 at one end of the flexible electronic display 3004. Inother examples, the spring element 3012 can be coupled in a differentmanner. When, for example, the spring element 3012 takes the form of asmall cylinder with an axle disposed therethrough, the display 3004 canbe attached to the cylinder (e.g., to one or both ends of the cylinder)such that the display 3004 can be rolled or unrolled when the article3000 is bent. In one case, the display 3004 can be attached to thecylinder such that the display 3004 can partially rotate (i.e., turn bya certain amount of degrees) when the article 3000 is bent, therebyrolling or unrolling a part of the display that is attached to thecylinder. Alternatively, the cylinder can be coupled to or at one end ofthe display 3004 and the axle can be movably coupled to the flexiblesupport structure 3002 (e.g., via a slot formed in sidewalls of theflexible support structure 3002) when the article 3000 is bent. When,for example, the spring element 3012 takes the form of a mechanicalslider, the mechanical slider can be attached to or at one end of thedisplay 3004 and movably coupled to the flexible support structure 3002(e.g., via rails disposed on the walls of the support structure 3002).

It will be appreciated that the article 3000 can also include additionalspring elements. For example, the article 300 may include another springelement, substantially similar to that described above, being configuredto apply tension to another end or side of the flexible electronicdisplay 3004. Also, one or more springs (not shown) may be configured toapply tension to the secondary electronic component 3006 within thecavity 2010 b. Generally, the spring elements apply a tension force toends or sides of flexible electronic components within cavities of aflexible support structure, thereby facilitating movement (e.g.,sliding) and helping to keep the flexible electronic components taut.

In addition to spring elements, flexible support structures and/ormechanical support components disposed within flexible supportstructures may be formed in certain shapes or may include certaincomponents to promote sliding of flexible electronic components, keepflexible electronic components taut, maintain certain positions offlexible electronic components relative to ends of flexible supportstructures, etc. FIGS. 58A, 58B, 58C, and 58D illustrate at least someexamples of such flexible support structures. In particular, FIGS. 58Aand 58B illustrate a dynamically flexible, attachable article 3100,again in the form of a wristband, that includes a flexible supportstructure 3102, a flexible electronic component in the form of aflexible electronic display 3104, and a secondary electronic component3106. The flexible electronic display 3004 and the secondary electroniccomponent 3006 of the example article 3000 are movably disposed along asurface 3110 of the flexible support structure 3102.

An end 3114 of the flexible electronic display 3104 and an end 3116 ofthe secondary electronic component 3106 may be attached or adhered suchthat together the flexible electronic display 3104 and the secondaryelectronic component 3106 form a near continuous sheet that is slidablydisposed on the surface 3110 of the flexible support structure 3102. Insome implementations, the article 3100 may include lubricants between:(i) the flexible electronic display 3104 and the secondary electroniccomponent 3106, and (ii) the surface 3110. These lubricants may promotesliding of the attached flexible electronic display 3104 and thesecondary electronic component 3106 along the surface 3110. Further, anend 3118 of the flexible support structure 3102 may be in the shape of ahalf cylinder to further promote sliding of the assembly of the flexibleelectronic display 3104 and the secondary electronic component 3106along the surface 3110.

Another end 3120 of one of the flexible electronic display 3104 or thesecondary electronic component 3106 may be electronically coupled andfixedly attached to an electronic module 3112. The electronics module3112 may be similar to that described with reference to FIG. 65, forexample. Thus, when the article 3100 is flexed or bent, the assembly ofthe flexible electronic display 3104 and the secondary electroniccomponent 3106 may slide along the surface 3110, independently of theflexible support structure 3102, while the end 3120 remains fixedlyattached to the electronic module 3112. Because this attachment to theelectronics module 3112 remains fixed, the flexible electronic display3104 and the secondary electronic component 3106 may easily receiveelectronic signals from the electronics module 3112 when the article3100 is in a bent state, without a need for sliding movement of theelectronic module or unnecessary slack in electronic leads.

Although an assembly of flexible electronic components sliding over asurface of the flexible support structure 3102 is depicted in FIGS. 58Aand 58B, some implementations may include different numbers (one, three,etc.) of flexible electronic components sliding along surfaces offlexible support structures, where the flexible support structuresinclude cylinder like ends promoting sliding of the flexible electroniccomponents. For example, FIG. 58C illustrates an article 3200 includinga single flexible electronic component 3202 sliding along a surface of aflexible support structure 3204.

Still further, flexible support structures may include specificcomponents configured to promote sliding of flexible electroniccomponents, in addition to having surfaces in the form of certain shapes(e.g., cylinders). FIG. 58D illustrates one example of such a flexiblesupport structure 3300 of an article 3302. The example flexible supportstructure 3300 includes a rolling cylinder component 3304 configured topromote sliding of a flexible display component 3306 and a secondaryelectronic component 3308 along a surface 3310. That is, when anassembly of the flexible display component 3306 and the secondaryelectronic component 3308 slide along the surface 3310, the rollingcylinder component 3304 may rotate about an axis 3312 so as to promotethe sliding of the assembly of the flexible display component 3306 andthe secondary electronic component 3308. Generally, flexible supportstructure may include any number and combination of specific componentsto promote sliding of flexible electronic components, such as cylinders,wheels, belts, etc.

FIG. 59 generally depicts a dynamically flexible article or device 4100,such as, for example, a wristband, a shoe, a belt, a piece of jewelry, astrip, a lamp, a sticker, a reader, or other flexible electronic device.The article 4100 includes a flexible electronic component 4102, aninterlayer 4104, and a flexible support structure 4106 coupled to theflexible electronic component via the interlayer 4104. As will bedescribed herein, the flexible electronic component 4102 can be aflexible display, a flexible OLED light or lamp, a collapsible e-reader,a roll out screen, a flexible sheet or screen, a sensor tag, anelectronic circuit, or other flexible electronic component. Theinterlayer 4104 can be or include one or more layers of foam, rubber,visco-elastic, adhesive, co-elastic material, stretchable material, orother suitable material(s). As will be described herein, the flexiblesupport structure 4106 can be a mono-stable support structure (i.e., thesupport structure has one stable position) or a multi-stable supportstructure (i.e., the support structure has more than one stablepositions), e.g., the flexible support structure can be a bi-stablesupport structure (i.e., the support structure has two stablepositions). Regardless, the flexible support structure 4106 is generallyconfigured to support and guide movement of the flexible electroniccomponent 4102 to or between any number of mechanical positions.

As such, the article 4100, particularly the flexible electroniccomponent 4102, is dynamically bendable or conformable to any number ofsurfaces, objects, or devices. The dynamically flexible article 4100can, in some cases, be attached to or worn on a user's body (e.g., auser's wrist, a user's arm, etc.), and can bend to fit the variouscontours or body surfaces on which the flexible electronic component4102 is located. The dynamically flexible article 4100 can also beeasily attached to other items or surfaces, such as mugs, cups,computers, phone covers, bike handles, automobile dashboards, stands,etc., that enable the flexible electronic component 4102 to be viewedwhen not being held in the user's hands or on one's body. The electronicflexible component 4102 of the attachable article 4100, and the contentprovided via or by the component 4100, is thus, in many cases, viewableto a user and is capable of being manipulated or actuated by the userwithout having to be held in one or both of the user's hands, making theflexible electronic component 4102 useable while the user is engaged inor performing other activities, such as running, biking, etc.

Unlike known mechanical support structures, which do not sufficientlylimit bending of a flexible electronic component and offer little-to-noprotection against torsion applied to the flexible electronic component,the flexible support structure 4106 described herein is configured toprotect the flexible electronic component 4102 by limiting undesirablebending of the flexible electronic component 4102 (e.g., bending inmultiple directions, bending beyond the minimum bending radius of thecomponent 4102) and/or controlling torsion that can be applied to theflexible electronic component 4102.

FIGS. 60A-60J illustrate a dynamically flexible article 4200, in theform of an attachable or wearable wristband. As illustrated in FIGS. 60Aand 60B, the article 4200 includes a flexible electronic component 4204and a flexible support structure 4208 coupled to the component 4204. Thearticle 4200 is configured for bending, flexing, or curving in anoutward direction (i.e., the component 4204 has a concave shape), whichis indicated by the arrows in FIG. 60A. Generally speaking, FIG. 60Adepicts the article 4200 in a first or substantially flat position,while FIG. 60B depicts the article 4200 in a second or curved position.

With reference to FIGS. 60A and 60B, the flexible electronic component4204 is a flexible electronic display that is dynamically bendable orconformable to a surface, object, or device, though in other embodimentsthe flexible electronic component 4204 can be a collapsible e-reader,roll-out screen, OLED light, or other electronic component. The flexibledisplay 4204 can be manufactured as any type of flexible display, suchas an e-paper display, an organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display,etc., further details of which are described in commonly owned U.S.Provisional Patent Application 61/920,705, filed Dec. 24, 2013 andentitled “Dynamically Flexible, Attachable Device Having an IntegralFlexible Display, the disclosure of which is hereby expresslyincorporated by reference herein. Once manufactured, the flexibledisplay 4204 can be configured for flexing, curving, or bending in aninward direction (i.e., the flexible display 4204 has a convex shape)and/or outward direction (i.e., the flexible display 4204 has a concaveshape). As is known in the art, the flexible display 4204 has a minimumbending radius, which is based on the details surrounding themanufacture of the flexible display 4204. When the flexible display 4204is flexed, curved, or bent beyond this minimum bending radius, one ormore layers of the display 4204 can delaminate, buckle, or crack, orotherwise be damaged, causing damage to the display 4204. Likewise, whenthe flexible display 4204 is flexed, curved, or bent in multipledirections and/or twisted (i.e., torsion is applied), one or more layersof the display 4204 can delaminate, buckle, crack, or other be damaged,causing damage to the display 4204.

With reference still to FIGS. 60A and 60B, the article 4200 includes anelectronics module 4212 that is disposed between opposing ends 4216 ofthe article 4200 and holds electronics, such as processors, memories,sensors, batteries, display drivers, etc. that are used to power anddrive the flexible display 4204 and to provide other communicationfunctionality for the device 4200. It will be appreciated that theelectronics module 4212 can be positioned elsewhere in other examples,such as, for example, disposed on the flexible display 4204 or atanother position between the ends 4216. If desired, the components ofthe electronics module 4212 can be sealed or otherwise protected fromwater, air, dirt, etc. to which the exterior of the device 4200 isexposed. For example, any or all of these electronic components may beencapsulated in a hermetically sealed manner to prevent any directexposure of these components to exterior forces and environmentalhazards.

As illustrated in FIG. 60A, the article 4200 further may include a touchscreen interface 4214 disposed over the flexible display 4204. The touchscreen interface 4214 can be a capacitive touch screen or any other typeof touch screen interface that is transparent in nature, and thus can belaid over the top of the flexible display 4204 to allow the flexibledisplay 4204 to be viewable there-through. As will be understood, thetouch screen interface 4214 may be powered and controlled by theelectronics disposed within the electronics module 4212 to performvarious different types of touch detection functionality associated witha typical touch screen display.

The flexible support structure 4208 in this example is a bi-stableflexible support, such that the flexible support structure 4208 ismovable between a substantially flat stable state or position, whichcorresponds to the first position of the article 4200 illustrated inFIG. 60A, and a curled or curved state or position, which corresponds tothe second position of the article 4200 illustrated in FIG. 60B. Theflexible support structure 4208 includes a first substrate 4220 and asecond substrate 4224 movably connected to the first substrate 4220. Assuch, the flexible support structure 4208 is configured to limit bendingof the article 4200, and, particularly, the flexible display 4204, whenthe structure 4208 is in both the flat stable state and the curvedstable state, as will be described in greater detail below. In otherwords, the flexible support structure 4208 is configured to limitbending of the article 4200, and, particularly, the flexible display4204 beyond the flat stable state and the curved stable state. Moreover,the flexible support structure 4208 is configured to provide torsionprotection for the article 4200 by resisting torsion applied thereto, aswill also be described in greater detail below.

As illustrated in FIG. 60B, an interlayer 4206 is disposed between theflexible display 4204 and the flexible support structure 4208. In thisexample, the interlayer 4206 is an adhesive layer that serves tomechanically couple (i.e., adhere) the flexible display 4204 to theflexible support structure 4208. In other examples, the interlayer 4206can be or include a stretchable material (e.g., a flexible fabriccovering integrally formed with the flexible display 4204 and coupled tothe flexible support structure 4208), one or more layers of foam,rubber, visco-elastic, or other suitable material(s), or combinationsthereof. In some cases, the interlayer 4206 only serves to coupleportions or segments of the display 4204 to corresponding portions orsegments of the flexible support structure 4208. In some cases, theinterlayer 4206 can reduce, or even eliminate, the local variations inthe bending radius of the article 4200. In other words, the inter layer4206 can serve to smoothen out any local variation in the bending of thearticle 4200, particularly the local variation of any bendingexperienced by the flexible display 4204, thereby providing a morecontinuous local bending radius when the article 4200 is curved or bent.Advantageously, in some cases, the inter layer 4206 can also providevisco-elastic cushioning to the display 4204, thereby making the display4204 less sensitive (e.g., less prone to damage) to objects droppedthereon. Finally, it will be appreciated that the article 4200 need notinclude the interlayer 4206, or any layer disposed between the flexibledisplay 4204 and the flexible support 4208. Instead, the flexibledisplay 4204 and the flexible support 4208 can be directly coupled to(e.g., integrally formed with) one another in any known manner.

As illustrated in FIGS. 60A and 60B, the flexible display 4204 is, inthis example, disposed over and spans the entire length of theinterlayer 4206 and the flexible support 4208, such that the flexibledisplay 4204 extends between the ends of the article 4200 and isviewable from the top of the article 4200. In other examples, theflexible display 4204 may only be disposed over and span a partiallength of the flexible support 4208 and/or may be disposed under theflexible support 4208.

Though not depicted in FIGS. 60A and 60B, the article 4200 can alsoinclude a connection structure that functions to connect the ends 4216of the article 4200 together when the article 4200 is bent, asillustrated in FIG. 60B, to form a circular, oval, or other-shaped band.In some embodiments, the connection structure can be amagnetically-based connection structure, such as, for example, aconnection structure in the form of magnets disposed within the flexiblesupport 4208 at or proximate to the ends 4216, magnets disposed at theends 4216 so that the ends 4216 connect end-to-end, or magnets disposedon the top or bottom sides of the support 4208 at or proximate to theends 4216 so that the article 4200 can be folded around on itself so asto create an article of variable length. One or more mechanicalconnectors (e.g., buckles, snap components, clasps, cooperating groovesand projections, cooperating tabs and recesses), any desired hook andloop connection material (e.g., Velcro), or some other connection meanscan be used instead of or in addition to the magnetically-basedconnection structure. These and other connection structures aredescribed in further detail in commonly owned U.S. Provisional PatentApplication 61/920,705, filed Dec. 24, 2013 and entitled “DynamicallyFlexible, Attachable Device Having an Integral Flexible Display, thedisclosure of which is hereby expressly incorporated by referenceherein.

Further details regarding the first and second substrates 4220, 4224will now be described in connection with FIGS. 60C-60F. With referenceto FIG. 60C, the first substrate 4220 in this example is a substantiallyrectangular metal (e.g., brass, aluminum, copper, steel, tin, nickel)strip that has a slightly concave shape (i.e., a large radius ofcurvature) and is formed as a bi-stable spring, such that the firstsubstrate 4220 may be referred to herein as a bi-stable flexible metalstrip. As illustrated in FIG. 60C, the first substrate 4220 has a topside 4250, a bottom side 4254, a pair of opposing ends 4258A, 4258B, alongitudinal axis 4262, and a pair of edges 4266A, 4266B disposedbetween the ends 4258A, 4258B and parallel to the longitudinal axis4262.

As illustrated in FIG. 60C, the first substrate 4220 includes a pair ofapertures 4268 and a plurality of slots 4270. The apertures 4268 eachhave a circular shape and are formed in the first substrate 4220 at orproximate to the end 4258A. The plurality of slots 4270 are generallyformed in the first substrate 4220 and are disposed from one end 4258Aof the first substrate 4220 to the other end 4258B of the firstsubstrate 4220. The plurality of slots 4270 include slots 4270A formedin the first substrate 4220 proximate to the edge 4266A and slots 4270Bformed in the first substrate 4220 proximate to the edge 4266B andacross from or opposite the slots 4270A. The slots 4270A are evenlyspaced apart from one another and formed at the same distance from theedge 4266A as one another, with the slots 4270B being evenly spacedapart from one another and formed at the same distance from the edge4266B as one another. It will be appreciated that as the distancebetween the apertures 4268 and the slots 4270A, 4270B increases, thelength of the slots 4270A, 4270B increases. In other words, the slots4270A, 4270B positioned further away from the apertures 4268 generallyhave a greater length than the slots 4270A, 4270B positioned closer tothe apertures 4268. As will be described in greater detail below, theslots 4270 generally define or correspond to the most extreme localbending that will be permitted.

FIG. 60D is a close-up view of a portion of the first substrate 4220,showing one of the slots 4270A and one of the slots 4270B in greaterdetail. As depicted, each slot 4270A, 4270B has a rectangular-shape incross-section, and includes a first portion 4274A that extends entirelythrough the thickness of the first substrate 4220 and a second portion4274B that extends through only a portion of the thickness of the firstsubstrate 4220. Each second portion 4274B is thus recessed relative tothe top side 4250 of the first substrate 4220. As illustrated in FIG.60D, each slot 4270A, 4270B has a first stop surface 4276 and a secondstop surface 4278 opposite the first stop surface 4276. The first stopsurface 4276, which is defined by a perimeter edge of the first portion4274A, generally defines or corresponds to the most extreme bending thatwill be permitted in the outward direction when the article 4200 is inthe second or curled position (see FIG. 60B). The second stop surface4278, which is defined by the intersection of the first portion 4274Aand the second portion 4274B, generally defines or corresponds to themost extreme bending that will be permitted in the inward direction whenthe article 4200 is in the first or substantially flat position (seeFIG. 60A).

In other embodiments, the first substrate 4220 can vary from the oneillustrated in FIGS. 60C and 60D. The first substrate 4220 can have adifferent shape (e.g., can be substantially or entirely flat, can have amore circular shape, can have an irregular shape, can have a more orless concave shape, can have a convex shape) and/or a different size. Inone embodiment, the first substrate 4220 can take the form of one ormore (e.g., two) elongated, narrow strips. The first substrate 4220 canalternatively be formed as a mono-stable flexible strip (i.e., the firstsubstrate can have one stable position, similar to a tape measure) or asa multi-stable flexible strip having more than two stable positions. Thefirst substrate 4220 can alternatively or additionally be made of one ormore different materials, such as, for example, plastic, leather, orcloth. Further yet, the first substrate 4220 can include a differentnumber of apertures 4268 (e.g., one aperture 4268, four apertures 4268),can include differently positioned apertures 4268 (e.g., apertures 4268disposed near or at the end 4258B), and/or can include differentlyconstructed apertures 4268 (e.g., apertures 4268 having a differentlyshaped cross-section). Alternatively, the first substrate 4220 need notinclude the apertures 4268. The first substrate 4220 can include adifferent number of slots 4270, can include differently positioned orspaced slots 4270 (e.g., spaced closer to or further from one another,spaced closer to or further from the edges 4258A, 4258B), and/or caninclude differently constructed slots 4270. For example, the slots 4270can take the form of openings, apertures, tracks, channels, grooves,recesses, or any other suitable structure.

With reference to FIG. 60E, the second substrate 4224 in this example isa substantially rectangular metal (e.g., brass, aluminum, copper, steel,tin, nickel) strip that has a slightly concave shape (i.e., a largeradius of curvature) and is formed as a bi-stable spring such that thesecond substrate 4224 may also be referred to herein as a bi-stableflexible metal strip. As illustrated in FIG. 60E, the second substrate4224 has a top side 4280, a bottom side 4284, a pair of opposing ends4288A, 4288B, a longitudinal axis 4292, and a pair of edges 4296A, 4296Bdisposed between the ends 4288A, 4288B and parallel to the longitudinalaxis 4292.

As illustrated in FIG. 60E, the second substrate 4224 includes a pair ofapertures 4298, a plurality of openings 4300, and a plurality ofprojections 4302. The apertures 4298 are identical in shape and size tothe apertures 4268 but are formed in the second substrate 4224 at orproximate to the end 4288A. The openings 4300 are essentially identicalin shape and size to the slots 4270 and are generally formed in thesecond substrate 4224 from one end 4288A of the second substrate 4224 tothe other end 4288B of the second substrate 4224. The plurality ofopenings 4300 includes openings 4300A formed in the second substrate4224 proximate to the edge 4296A and openings 4300B formed in the secondsubstrate 4224 proximate to the edge 4296B and across from or oppositethe openings 4300A. The openings 4300A are formed the same distance fromthe edge 4296A as one another, while the openings 4300B are formed thesame distance from the edge 4296B as one another. It will be appreciatedthat as the distance between the apertures 4298 and the openings 4300A,4300B increases, the length of the openings 4300A, 4300B increases. Inother words, the openings 4300A, 4300B positioned further away from theapertures 4298 generally have a greater length than the openings 4300A,4300B positioned closer to the apertures 4298. The plurality ofprojections 4302 are generally associated with or correspond to theopenings 4300, respectively. The plurality of projections 4302 aregenerally formed or defined such that each projection 4302 extendsoutwardly or away from the top side 4280 of the second substrate 4224 ata position over or above a respective one of the openings 4300. Theplurality of projections 4302 includes projections 4302A formed ordefined proximate to the edge 4296A and projections 4302B formed ordefined proximate to the edge 4296B. The projections 4302A are formed atthe same distance from the edge 4296A as one another, while theprojections 4302B are formed at the same distance from the edge 4296B asone another. As with the openings 4300A, 4300B, it will be appreciatedthat as the distance between the apertures 4298 and the projections4302A, 4302B increases, the length of the projections 4302A, 4302Bincreases. In other words, the projections 4302A, 4302B positionedfurther away from the apertures 4298 generally have a greater lengththan the projections 4302A, 4302B positioned closer to the apertures4298.

FIG. 60F is a close-up view of a portion of the second substrate 4224,showing one opening 4300A, one opening 4300B, one projection 4302A, andone projection 4302B in greater detail. As illustrated, each projection4302A, 4302B is generally shaped like a shelf, with a substantiallyhorizontal first portion 4304A that is coupled to the top side 4280 andextends inward into a portion of a respective one of the openings 4300A,4300B, a substantially horizontal second portion 4304C disposed over orabove a respective one of the openings 4300A, 4300B, and a substantiallyvertical step portion 4304B that connects the first portion 4304A andthe second portion 4304B.

In other embodiments, the second substrate 4224 can vary from the oneillustrated in FIGS. 60E and 60F. The second substrate 4224 can have adifferent shape (e.g., can be substantially or entirely flat, can have amore circular shape, can have an irregular shape, can have a more orless concave shape, can have a convex shape) and/or can have a differentsize. The second substrate 4224 can alternatively be formed as amono-stable flexible strip (i.e., the second substrate 4224 can have onestable position, similar to a tape measure) or as a multi-stableflexible strip having more than two stable positions. The secondsubstrate 4224 can alternatively or additionally be made of one or moredifferent materials, such as, for example, plastic, leather, or cloth.Further yet, the second substrate 4224 can include a different number ofapertures 4298 (e.g., one aperture 4298, four apertures 4298), caninclude differently positioned apertures 4298 (e.g., apertures 4298disposed near or at the end 4288B), and/or can include differentlyconstructed apertures 4298 (e.g., apertures 4298 having a differentlyshaped cross-section). Alternatively, the second substrate 4224 need notinclude the apertures 4298. The second substrate 4224 can include adifferent number of openings 4300 and/or projections 4302, differentlypositioned or spaced openings 4300 and/or projections 4302 (e.g.,openings 4300 spaced closer to or further from the edges 4288A, 4288B orfrom each other), and/or differently constructed openings 4300 and/orprojections 4302 (e.g., projections 4302 having a different shape). Forexample, the projections 4302 can take the form of tabs, hooks, knobs,bumps, or any other suitable structure(s).

FIG. 60G depicts the first and second substrates 4220, 4224 aligned withand movably connected or coupled to one another. It will be appreciatedthat the first and second substrates 4220, 4224 have a substantiallysimilar shape and size, such that when the assembled flexible supportstructure 4208 is viewed from the top, the second substrate 4224 issubstantially not visible (with the exception of the projections 4302),while when the flexible support structure 4208 is viewed from thebottom, the first substrate 4220 is substantially not visible. In otherexamples, however, the first and second substrates 4220, 4224 need nothave a substantially similar shape and/or size. In some examples, one ofthe first and second substrates 4220, 4224 can have the shapeillustrated in FIGS. 60C-60F, while the other one of the substrates4220, 4224 can have a different shape, such as, for example, asubstantially or entirely flat shape. For example, the first substrate4220 can be substantially flat, in which case the slots 4270 of thefirst substrate 4220 can be wider, as compared to the slots 4270illustrated herein, in order to accommodate the transition of the secondsubstrate 4224 from the concave state to the flat state when the article4200 is moved from the substantially flat position to the curledposition. In this example, the first and second substrates 4220, 4224would be overlaying and in contact with one another when the article4200 is in the curled position, but would only touch one another at oralong the edges 4266A, 4266B, 4288A, 4288B when the article 4200 is inthe substantially flat position. As another example, the secondsubstrate 4224 can have the shape illustrated in FIGS. 60E and 60F,while the first substrate 4220 can take the form of one or more narrow,elongated strips movably coupled to the second substrate 4224.

When the first and second substrates 4220, 4224 are substantiallyaligned with one another as illustrated in FIG. 60G, the apertures 4268of the first substrate 4220 are aligned with the apertures 4298 of thesecond substrate 4224, the slots 4270 of the first substrate 4220 arealigned with the openings 4300 of the second substrate 4224, and theprojections 4302 of the second substrate 4224 are movably disposedwithin the slots 4270 of the first substrate 4220. At least some portionof the first substrate 4220 is fixedly attached to at least some portionof the second substrate 4224. In this example, one end 4258A of thefirst substrate 4220 is fixedly attached to a corresponding end 4288A ofthe second substrate 4220 using or via a fastener 4350 (e.g., a pin, arivet, a screw) inserted into each of the aligned pairs of apertures4268, 4298. The other ends 4258B, 4288B of the first and secondsubstrates 4220, 4224 are thus freely movable relative to one another.

In other examples, the apertures 4268, 4298 can be formed or defined indifferent portions of the first and second substrates 4220, 4224, suchthat the first and second substrates 4220, 4224 can be fixedly attachedto one another at different portions. For example, the apertures 4268,4298 can be formed at or near the ends 4258B, 4288B of the first andsecond substrates 4220, 4224, respectively, such that the first andsecond substrates 4220, 4224 can be fixedly attached to one another ator near the ends 4258B, 4288B, rather than at the ends 4258A, 4288A. Asanother example, the apertures 4268, 4298 can be formed at or near amiddle portion of the first and second substrates 4220, 4224, such thatthe first and second substrates 4220, 4224 can be fixedly attached toone another at or near the middle portion, rather than at the ends4258A, 4288A. In other examples, the first and second substrates 4220,4224 can include more or less apertures 4268, 4298. For example, thefirst substrate 4220 can include one aperture 4268 and the secondsubstrate 4224 can include one aperture 4298, with the first and secondsubstrates 4220, 4224 locally fixedly attached to one another at or viathe two apertures 4268, 4298. Further yet, the first and secondsubstrates 4220, 4224 can be locally welded, adhered (e.g., glued), orotherwise fixedly attached to one another in a way such that theapertures 4268, 4298 are not necessary.

FIG. 60H is a close-up view of a portion of the support structure 4208illustrated in FIG. 60G. As noted above, the projections 4302 of thesecond substrate 4224 are movably disposed within the slots 4270 of thefirst substrate 4220. More specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 60H, thefirst portion 4304A of each projection 4302 is aligned with, butslightly recessed relative to, the first portion 4274A of a respectiveslot 4270, the step portion 4304B of each projection 4302 is disposedwithin the first portion 4274A of a respective slot 4270, and the secondportion 4304C of each projection 4302 is seated or disposed on thesecond portion 4274B of a respective slot 4270. As such, the stepportion 4304B of each projection 4302 is movably disposed between thefirst and second stop surfaces 4276, 4278 of a respective slot 4270.

It will be appreciated that the first and second substrates 4220, 4224can be movably connected to one another in a different manner. Forexample, the first substrate 4220 and the second substrate 4224 can bereversed, with the second substrate 4224 including the slots 4270 andthe first substrate 4220 including the projections 4302 movably disposedwithin the slots 4270. As another example, the first and secondsubstrates 4220, 4224 can each include slots 4270 and projections 4302(e.g., alternating slots 4270 and projections 4302). The first andsecond substrates 4220, 4224 can, in some examples, be movably connectedto one another in a different location, in multiple locations, and/orusing components other than the slots 4270 and the projections 4302illustrated herein. Any number and/or combination of fasteners, grooves,tabs, protrusions, ribs, slots, and other components can be used forthis/these purpose(s).

In any event, the flexible support 4208, via the interaction betweencorresponding slots 4270 and projections 4302, can limit bending of thearticle 4200, and, more particularly, the flexible display 4204. Becausethe article 4200 is configured for bending in the outward direction, theflexible support 4208 is configured to permit some bending of thearticle 4200, and, more particularly, the flexible display 4204, in theoutward direction but is configured to prevent bending of the flexibledisplay 4204 in the outward direction (indicated by the arrows BOUT inFIG. 60A) beyond its bending limit (e.g., beyond its minimum bendingradius). At the same time, the flexible support 4208 can substantiallylimit bending of the article 4200, and, more particularly, the flexibledisplay 4204, in the inward direction (indicated by the arrows BIN inFIG. 60A). It will thus be appreciated that the flexible support 4208 isconfigured to permit more bending of the article 4200 in the outwarddirection than in the inward direction, though this need not be thecase.

When the article 4200 is in the first or substantially flat stableposition (i.e., the position illustrated in FIGS. 60A, 60G, and 60H),and the article 4200 is bent or curved in the outward direction(indicated by the arrows in FIG. 60A), the applied bending force causesthe projections 4302 of the second substrate 4224 to move relative tothe slots 4270 of the first substrate 4220. Specifically, the appliedbending force causes the first portion 4304A of each projection 4302 toslide relative to and away from the first portion 4274A of a respectiveslot 4270 and underneath the first substrate 4220, causes the stepportion 4304B of each projection 4302 to slide away from the secondportion 4274B and toward the stop surface 4276 of a respective slot4270, and causes the second portion 4304C of each projection 4302 toslide along the second portion 4274B and toward the first portion 4274Aof a respective slot 4270. At some point, the article 4200 will be bentto such a degree that the step portion 4304B of each projection 4302contacts the first stop surface 4276 of a respective slot 4270, asdepicted in FIG. 60I. At this point, the article 4200 has reached itspre-defined bending limit and any further bending of the article 4200,particularly the flexible display 4204, in the outward direction isprevented. This position generally corresponds to the second or curledstable position of the article 4200 (see FIG. 60B), such that thearticle 4200 cannot be bent or curved beyond the second stable position,though that need not be the case (e.g., a limited amount of bending canbe permitted beyond the second or curled stable position).

When the article 4200 is in the first or substantially flat stableposition (i.e., the position illustrated in FIGS. 60A, 60G, and 60H),and the article 4200 is bent or curved in the inward direction, theapplied bending force causes the projections 4302 of the secondsubstrate 4224 to move relative to the slots 4270 of the first substrate4220. Specifically, the applied bending force causes the first portion4304A of each projection 4302 to slide relative to the first portion4274A of a respective slot 4270, causes the step portion 4304B of eachprojection 4302 to slide toward the second portion 4274B and away fromthe stop surface 4276 of a respective slot 4270, and causes the secondportion 4304C of each projection 4302 to slide along the second portion4274B and away from the first portion 4274A of a respective slot 4270.At some point, the article 4200 will be bent to such a degree (i.e.,corresponding to the maximum bending amount in this direction) that thestep portion 4304B of each projection 4302 contacts the second stopsurface 4278 of a respective slot 4270, as depicted in FIG. 60J. At thispoint, the article 4200 has reached its pre-defined bending limit andany further bending of the article 4200, particularly the flexibledisplay 4204, in the inward direction is prevented.

The flexible support structure 4208 can also provide torsion control. Byvirtue of having two substrates 4220, 4224 movably connected to oneanother and the slots 4270 and the projections 4302 being positionedproximate to the edges 4266A, 4266B and 4296A, 4296B, respectively, andconfigured to interferingly contact one another, the flexible supportstructure 4208 can substantially resist or prevent torsion from beingapplied to the longitudinal sides of the article 4200, and, thus, theflexible display 4204. At the very least, the flexible support structure4208 described herein will substantially reduce the amount of torsionthat can be applied to the article 4200, and, thus, the flexible display4204. It will be appreciated that the flexible support structure 4208can thus help to prevent the damage to the brittle layers of theflexible display 4204 that would otherwise be caused by torsion appliedto the article 4200. It will be appreciated that the width and/or thelength of the slots and the projections 4302, and/or the spacing betweenthe slots 4270 and the projections 4302, can be varied, yet the flexiblesupport structure 4208 can still provide at least some level of torsioncontrol. In some of these cases, the width, length, and/or the spacingcan be varied such that the flexible support structure 4208 providesless resistance to torsion, and thus permits more bending in thetransverse direction.

In other examples, the components of the flexible support 4208, e.g.,the slots 4270, the projections 4302, can be varied to control (e.g.,adjust) the amount of bending between adjacent portions of the article4200, and, in turn, adjust the shape of the article 4200 in the secondor curled stable position. In some examples, the length of the slots4270 and the projections 4302 can be varied to control (e.g., adjust)the amount of bending between portions of the article 4200 adjacent tothose slots 4270 and projections 4302, and, in turn, adjust the shape ofthe article 4200 in the second or curled stable position. In general,the degree to which the length of the slots 4270 and the projections4302 is varied relative to adjacent slots 4270 and projections 4302determines the degree to which the amount of bending can be varied forportions of the article 4200 therebetween. More specifically, the morethe length of the slots 4270 and the projections 4302 is increasedrelative to adjacent slots 4270 and projections 4302, the greater theincrease in the amount that portions of the article 4200 between theslots 4270 and the projections 4302 (i.e., between the (i) increasedlength slots 4270 and projections 4302 and (ii) the slots 4270 andprojections 4302 adjacent thereto) can be bent. Conversely, the less thelength of the slots 4270 and the projections 4302 is increased relativeto adjacent slots 4270 and projections 4302, the smaller the increase inthe amount that portions of the article 4200 between the slots 4270 andthe projections 4302 (i.e., between the (i) increased length slots 4270and projections 4302 and (ii) the slots 4270 and projections 4302adjacent thereto) can be bent. FIGS. 61A and 61B illustrate an exampleof this concept. As illustrated, the length L3 of the slot 4270B3 andthe length of the projection 4302B3 are greater than the length L2 ofthe slot 4270B2 and the length of the projection 4302B2, respectively,which are much greater than the length L1 of the slot 4270B1 and thelength of the projection 4302B1. In other words, the difference betweenthe length L3 of the slot 4270B3 and the length of the projection4302B3, and the length L2 of the slot 4270B2 and the length of theprojection 4302B2, is smaller than the difference between (ii) thelength L2 of the slot 4270B2 and the length of the projection 4302B2,and the length L1 of the slot 4270B1 and the length of the projection4302B1. As a result, the portion of the article 4200 between the slot4270B1 and the projection 4302B1 and the slot 4270B2 and the projection4302B2 can be bent to a greater degree than the portion of the article4200 between the slot 4270B2 and the projection 4302B2 and the slot4270B3 and the projection 4302B3, which can be seen in FIG. 61B. In thisway, different sections of the article 4200 (e.g., the sections disposedalong the sides) can be bent or flexed more than other portions of thearticle 4200 (e.g., the sections disposed along the top and bottom),thereby facilitating the formation of a more oval-shaped article 4200(see, e.g., FIG. 61B), which can be, when worn, more comfortable than acircular-shaped article. Further yet, the number of and spacing betweenthe different slots 4270 and the number of and spacing between thedifferent projections 4302 can be adjusted to control (e.g., adjust) theamount of bending between adjacent portions of the article 4200, and, inturn, adjust the shape of the article 4200 in the second or curledstable position. As also illustrated in FIGS. 61A and 61B, the spacingbetween adjacent slots 4270B and the spacing between adjacentprojections 4302B can be different at different points along the article4200. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 61A and 61B, the longitudinaldistance or spacing between adjacent slots 4270B1 and 4270B2 and betweenadjacent projections 4302B1 and 4302B2 (S1) is less than thelongitudinal distance or spacing between adjacent slots 4270B2 and4270B3 and between adjacent projections 4302B2 and 4302B3 (S2) [S2>S1].It will be appreciated that the length of the components of the flexiblesupport 4208 and, in some cases, the spacing between the components ofthe flexible support 4208, can be varied in a way such that the article4200 has any number of other shapes (e.g., an elliptical shapedarticle).

In further examples, the article 4200 can include an adjustable flexiblesupport structure, such that the article 4200 can be adjusted to reach adesired shape and size (e.g., to produce the shape and size of the wristof the user wearing the article 4200). This is generally achieved byproviding the flexible support structure with one or moreuser-selectable components (e.g., slots, fixation points). Thisgenerally produces an adjustable flexible support structure, such thatthe article 4200 can be adjusted to reach the desired shape and size.This can be advantageous when, for example, the article 4200 is used bya user with a small wrist, but is then used by another user with alarger wrist (or vice-versa).

FIGS. 62A and 62B depict an example of an adjustable flexible supportstructure 4408. The adjustable flexible support structure 4408 includesmany of the components described above in FIGS. 60A-60J (with commonreference numerals used for common components). For illustrativepurposes, the flexible support structure 4408 is divided into fivebending regions (BR1-BR5). Unlike the flexible support structure 4208,which includes slots 4270 and projections 4302 in bending region 4(BR4), the flexible support structure 4408 instead includes two pairs ofuser-selectable slots, a first pair of user-selectable slots 4416A and asecond pair of user-selectable slots 4416B, formed in the firstsubstrate 4220. The slots 4416A and 4416B each have a generallyelliptical shape, with the slots 4416A being slightly longer than theslots 4416B. Each of the slots 4416A, 4416B defines a first stop surface4418 and a second stop surface 4420 opposite the first stop surface4418.

Generally speaking, the first and second pairs of slots 4416A, 4416Bdefine different sizes of the flexible support structure 4408. Morespecifically, the slots 4416A are positioned to define a first length ofthe bending region 4 (BR4) of the flexible support structure 4408, whilethe slots 4416B are positioned to define a second length of the bendingregion 4 (BR4) of the flexible support structure 4408, the second lengthbeing greater than the first length. It will thus be appreciated thatthe flexible support structure 4408 will be longer when the second slots4416B are selected. A user may select the desired slots, and thus thedesired length (the first or the second length), by disposing a pair ofpins 4412 into the pair of desired slots 4416A or 4416B. Morespecifically, the user selects the pair of desired slots 4416A or 4416Band fits the pins 4412 into a tight fitting hole (not shown) formed inthe second substrate 4224 below each of the desired slots 4416A or4416B. The pins 4412 are then movably disposed within the slots 4416A or4416B. In addition, the flexible support structure 4408 also includes apair of fixation points 4422 at which the first and second substrates4220, 4224 are fixedly attached to one another. As illustrated in FIG.62A, one fixation point 4422 is positioned at or near the border betweenbending region 1 (BR3) and bending region 2 (BR2), and one fixationpoint 4422 is positioned at or near the border between bending region 2(BR2) and bending region 3 (BR3).

Because of the fixation points 4422, bending of the flexible supportstructure 4408 is generally prevented in bending region 2 (BR2).Moreover, because the slots in each pair have the same length as oneanother, no bending is permitted in bending region 4 (BR4). However,when the flexible support structure 4408 is bent in bending region 3(BR3), the pins 4412 can move within the selected slots 4416A or 4416Bfrom the position shown in FIG. 62A toward the second stop surface 4420.Depending on the degree of bending in bending region 3 (BR3), the pins4412 can move toward, but not into contact with, the second stop surface4420, or the pins 4412 can move toward and into contact with the secondstop surface 4420. In any event, when the slots 4416A are selected, theflexible support structure 4408, when bent, will be shorter, and therebyhave more of a circular-shape, such that the article 4200 is sized tofit, for example, a user having a smaller wrist. Meanwhile, when theslots 4416B are selected, the flexible support structure 4408, whenbent, will be longer, and thereby have more of an oval-shape, such thatthe article 4200 is sized to fit, for example, a user having a largerwrist.

The flexible support structure 4408 can, in other examples, vary fromthe support structure 4408 illustrated in FIGS. 62A and 62B. Theflexible support structure 4408 can include more or less user-selectableslots (e.g., three pairs of user-selectable slots), the user-selectableslots can have a different shape and/or can have a different size (e.g.,the slots 4416A can be the same length as the slots 4416B, the slots ineach pair can have a different length, such that bending to a certainminimum radius is permitted in bending region 4 (BR4)), theuser-selectable slots can be constructed differently, and/or theuser-selectable slots can be positioned differently. For example, theuser-selectable slots can be positioned to define different lengths ofother bending regions of the support structure 4408 (e.g., the bendingregion 3). As another example, the user-selectable slots can bepositioned closer to one another or further apart from one another.

FIGS. 62C and 62D depict another example of an adjustable flexiblesupport structure 4428. The adjustable flexible support structure 4428is substantially similar to the flexible support structure 4408, withcommon reference numerals used for common components. For illustrativepurposes, the flexible support structure 4428, like the supportstructure 4408, is divided into five bending regions (BR1-BR5). Theflexible support structure 4428 includes three different pairs ofuser-selectable slots, a first pair of user-selectable slots 4436A, asecond pair of user-selectable slots 4436B, and a third pair ofuser-selectable slots 4436C. The slots 4436A-4436C each have a generallyelliptical shape and are of the same length. The slots 4436A-4436C eachdefine a first stop surface 4438 and a second stop surface 4440 oppositethe second stop surface 4440.

The pairs of slots 4436A-4436C generally define different sizes of theflexible support structure 4428. More specifically, the slots 4436A arepositioned to define a first length of the bending region 4 (BR4) of theflexible support structure 4428, the slots 4436B are positioned todefine a second length of the bending region 4 (BR4) of the flexiblesupport structure 4428, and the slots 4436C are positioned to define athird length of the bending region 4 (BR4) of the flexible supportstructure 4428, the first length being greater than the second lengthand the second length being greater than the third length. It will thusbe appreciated that the flexible support structure 4428 will be thelongest when the first slots 4436A are selected and the shortest whenthe third slots 4436C are selected.

A user may select the desired slots, and thus the desired length (thefirst, second, or third length), by disposing a pair of pins 4432 intothe desired pair of slots 4436A, 4436B, and 4436C. More specifically,the user selects the pair of desired slots 4436A, 4436B, or 4436C andfits the pins 4432 into a tight fitting hole (not shown) formed in thesecond substrate 4224 below each of the desired slots 4436A, 4436B, or4436C. The pins 4432 are then movably disposed within the slots 4436A,4436B, or 4436C. In addition, the flexible support structure 4428 alsoincludes a pair of fixation points 4422 at which the first and secondsubstrates 4220, 4224 are fixedly attached to one another.

Because of the fixation points 4422, bending of the flexible supportstructure 4428 is generally prevented in bending region 2 (BR2).Moreover, because the slots in each pair have the same length as oneanother, no bending is permitted in bending region 4 (BR4). Thus,bending regions 2 and 4 (BR2, BR4) generally remain flat at all times.However, when the article, particularly the flexible support structure4428, is bent in bending region 3 (BR3), the pins 4432 can move withinthe selected slots 4436A, 4436B, or 4436B from the position shown inFIG. 62C toward the second stop surface 4440. Depending on the degree ofbending in bending region 3 (BR3), the pins 4432 can move toward, butnot into contact with, the second stop surface 4440, or the pins 4432can move toward and into contact with the second stop surface 4440. Inany event, when the slots 4436A are selected, the flexible supportstructure 4428, when bent, will be longer, and thereby have more of anoval-shape, such that the article 4200 is sized to fit, for example, auser having a larger wrist. Meanwhile, when the slots 443CA areselected, the flexible support structure 4428, when bent, will beshorter, and thereby have more of a circular-shape, such that thearticle 4200 is sized to fit, for example, a user having a smallerwrist.

The flexible support structure 4428 can, in other examples, vary fromthe support structure 4428 illustrated in FIGS. 62C and 62D. Theflexible support structure 4428 can include more or less user-selectableslots (e.g., four pairs of user-selectable slots), the user-selectableslots can have a different shape and/or can have a different size (e.g.,one of the slots in each slot pair 4436A, 4436B, and 4436C can be biggerthan the other slot), the user-selectable slots can be constructeddifferently, and/or the user-selectable slots can be positioneddifferently. For example, the user-selectable slots can be positioned todefine different lengths of other bending regions of the supportstructure 4428 (e.g., the bending region 3). As another example, theuser-selectable slots can be positioned closer to one another or furtherapart from one another. Further yet, one or more of the user-selectableslots can be replaced by slots 4270, and the projections 4302 used incombination with the one or more slots 4270, as described above.

FIGS. 62E and 62F depict another example of an adjustable flexiblesupport structure 4448. The adjustable flexible support structure 4448is similar to the flexible support structure 4428, with common referencenumerals used for common components. For illustrative purposes, theflexible support structure 4448, like the support structure 4428, isdivided into five bending regions (BR1-BR5), Unlike the flexible supportstructure 4428, which includes three pairs of user-selectable slots4436A, 4436B, and 4436C, the flexible support structure 4448 includesthree singular user-selectable slots 4436A, 4436B, 4436C. These singularslots 4436A, 4436B, 4436C similarly define different sizes of theflexible support structure 4448, but do so by defining different lengthsof an arc of the bending region 3 (BR3) of the flexible supportstructure 4448. In addition to these slots 4436A, 4436B, 4436C, theflexible support structure 4448 also includes a pair of fixation points4452 at or near the border between bending region 3 (BR3) and bendingregion 3 (BR3).

A user may select the desired slot, and thus the desired arc length (thefirst, second, or third arc length), by disposing a pin 4432 into thedesired slot 4436A, 4436B, and 4436C. More specifically, the userselects the slot 4436A, 4436B, or 4436C and fits the pin 4432 into atight fitting hole (not shown) formed in the second substrate 4224 belowthe desired slot 4436A, 4436B, or 4436C. The pin 4432 is then movablydisposed within the slot 4436A, 4436B, or 4436C.

Because of the fixation points 4452, bending of the flexible supportstructure 4448 in bending region 2 (BR2) will have little to no effecton movement of the pin 4432 within the selected slot 4436A, 4436B, or4436C. However, when the flexible support structure 4448 is bent inbending region 4 (BR4), the pin 4432 can move within the selected slot4436A, 4436B, or 4436B from the position shown in FIG. 62E toward thesecond stop surface 4440. Depending on the degree of bending in bendingregion 4 (BR4), the pin 4432 can move toward, but not into contact with,the second stop surface 4440, or the pin 4432 can move toward and intocontact with the second stop surface 4440. Consistent with thediscussion above, when the slot 4436A is selected, the flexible supportstructure 4448, when bent, will be longer, and thereby have more of anoval-shape, such that the article 4200 is sized to fit, for example, auser having a larger wrist. Meanwhile, when the slot 4436C is selected,the flexible support structure 4448, when bent, will be shorter, andthereby have more of a circular-shape, such that the article 4200 issized to fit, for example, a user having a smaller wrist.

The flexible support structure 4448 can, in other examples, vary fromthe support structure 4448 illustrated in FIGS. 62E and 62F. Theflexible support structure 4448 can include more or less user-selectableslots (e.g., four user-selectable slots), the user-selectable slots canhave a different shape and/or can have a different size) and/or theuser-selectable slots can be positioned differently. For example, theuser-selectable slots can be positioned to define different lengths ofother bending regions of the support structure 4448 (e.g., the bendingregion 2). As another example, the user-selectable slots can bepositioned closer to one another or further apart from one another.Further yet, one or more of the user-selectable slots can be replaced byslots 4270, and the projections 4302 used in combination with the one ormore slots 4270, as described above. Alternatively or additionally, theflexible support structure 4448 can include more or less fixation points4452 and/or differently positioned fixation points 4452. For example,when the user-selectable slots are positioned to define different arclengths of another bending region of the support structure 4448, thefixation points 4452 can be positioned at or near that another bendingregion.

FIGS. 62G and 62H depict yet another example of an adjustable flexiblesupport structure 4468. The adjustable flexible support structure 4468is substantially similar to the flexible support structure 4408, withcommon reference numerals used for common components. However, unlikethe flexible support structure 4408, which includes the two pairs ofuser-selectable slots 4416A, 4416B, the flexible support structure 4468instead includes four user-selected fixation or attachment points, thefour user fixation or attachment points being selected from a pluralityof possible fixation or attachment points 4472A-4472H. The possiblefixation or attachment points 4472A-4472H are points at which the firstand second substrates 4220, 4224 can be locally fixed or attached to oneanother by a fastener 4476, such as, for example, a pin, a rivet, ascrew, or other fastening means.

Different combinations of fixation or attachment points 4472A-4472Hdefine different lengths of the bending region 4 (BR4) of the supportstructure 4468. Thus, by selecting different combinations of fixation orattachment points, a user can vary the length, and thus the shape andsize, of the support structure 4468. The user typically selects twofixation points 4472A-4472D and two fixation points 4472E-4472H (i.e.,two fixation points on each side), though this is not required (e.g.,the user can select more or less points). Generally speaking, selectingcombinations of fixation or attachment points 4472A-4472H that includeattachment points closer to one another will result in a shorter bendingregion 4 (BR4) of the support structure 4468. For example, auser-selected combination of fixation or attachment points 4472B, 4472C,4472F, and 4472G define a first length of the bending region 4 (BR4),while a user-selected combination of fixation or attachment points4472A, 4472D, 4472E, and 4472H define a second length of the bendingregion 4 (BR4), the second length being greater than the first length.To form the desired fixation or attachment points 4472A-4472H, the usercan dispose the fasteners 4476 into tight fitting holes (not shown)formed into corresponding portions of the first and second substrates4220, 4224.

The flexible support structure 4468 can, in other examples, vary fromthe support structure 4468 illustrated in FIGS. 62G and 62H. Theflexible support structure 4468 can include more or less user-selectablefixation points (e.g., ten user-selectable fixation points) and/or theuser-selectable fixation points can be positioned differently. Forexample, the user-selectable fixation points can be positioned to definedifferent lengths of other bending regions of the support structure 4468(e.g., the bending region 3). As another example, the user-selectablefixation points can be positioned closer to one another or further apartfrom one another. More or less fixation points can also be selected. Forexample, two or six fixation points can be selected instead of four.

FIGS. 63A-63J illustrate another dynamically flexible article 4500, inthe form of an attachable or wearable wristband. As illustrated in FIGS.63A and 63B, the article 4500 is similar to the article 4200 describedabove, with common components represented by common reference numerals,but includes a flexible support structure 4508, different from theflexible support structure 4208, coupled to the flexible display 4204.The article 4500 is configured for bending, flexing, or curving in anoutward direction (i.e., such that the flexible display 4204 has aconcave shape), which is indicated by the arrows in FIG. 63A. FIG. 63Adepicts the article 4500 in a first or substantially flat position. FIG.63B depicts the article 4500 in a second or curved position.

Like the flexible support structure 4208 described above, the flexiblesupport structure 4508 is a bi-stable flexible support, such that theflexible support structure 4508 is movable between a flat stable stateor position (see FIG. 63A) and a curled or curved stable state orposition (see FIG. 63B). The flexible support structure 4508 includes afirst substrate 4520 and a second substrate 4524 movably connected tothe first substrate 4520. As such, the flexible support structure 4508is configured to limit bending of the article 4500, particularly thedisplay 4204, when the structure 4508 is in both the flat stable stateand the curved stable state, as will be described in greater detailbelow. In other words, the flexible support structure 4508 is configuredto limit bending of the article 4500, particularly the display 4204,beyond the flat stable state and the curved stable state. Moreover, theflexible support structure 4508 is configured to resist torsion appliedto the article 4500, as will also be described in greater detail below.

As illustrated in FIG. 63B, an interlayer 4506 is disposed between theflexible display 4204 and the flexible support structure 4508. In thisexample, the interlayer 4506 is an adhesive layer that serves tomechanically couple (e.g., adhere) the flexible display 4204 to theflexible support structure 4508. In other examples, the interlayer 4506can be or include a stretchable material (e.g., a flexible fabriccovering integrally formed with the flexible display 4204 and coupled tothe flexible support structure 4508), one or more layers of foam,rubber, visco-elastic, or other suitable material(s), or combinationsthereof. In some cases, the interlayer 4506 only serves to coupleportions or segments of the display 4204 to corresponding portions orsegments of the flexible support structure 4508. In some cases, theinterlayer 4506 can reduce, or even eliminate, the local variations inthe bending radius of the article 4500. In other words, the interlayer4506 can serve to smoothen out any local variation in the bending of thearticle 4500, particularly the local variation of any bendingexperienced by the flexible display 4204, thereby providing a morecontinuous local bending radius when the article 4500 is curved or bent.Advantageously, in some cases, the interlayer 4506 can also providevisco-elastic cushioning to the display 4204, thereby making the display4204 less sensitive (e.g., less prone to damage) to objects droppedthereon. Finally, it will be appreciated that the article 4500 need notinclude the interlayer 4506, or any layer disposed between the flexibledisplay 4204 and the flexible support 4508. Instead, the flexibledisplay 4204 and the flexible support 4508 can be directly coupled to(e.g., integrally formed with) one another in any known manner.

As illustrated in FIGS. 63A and 63B, the flexible display 4204 is, inthis example, disposed over and spans the entire length of theinterlayer 4506 and the flexible support 4508, such that the flexibledisplay 4204 extends between the ends of the article 4500 and isviewable from the top of the article 4500. In other examples, theflexible display 4204 may only be disposed over and span a partiallength of the flexible support 4508 and/or may be disposed under theflexible support 4508.

Though not depicted in FIGS. 63A and 63B, the article 4500 can alsoinclude a connection structure that functions to connect the ends 4516of the article 4500 together when the article 4500 is bent, asillustrated in FIG. 63B, to form a circular, oval, or other-shaped band.In some embodiments, the connection structure can be amagnetically-based connection structure, such as, for example, aconnection structure in the form of magnets disposed within the flexiblesupport 4508 at or proximate to the ends 4516, magnets disposed at theends 4516 so that the ends 4516 connect end-to-end, or magnets disposedon the top or bottom sides of the support 4508 at or proximate to theends 4516 so that the article 4500 can be folded around on itself so asto create an article of variable length. One or more mechanicalconnectors (e.g., buckles, snap components, clasps, cooperating groovesand projections, cooperating tabs and recesses), any desired hook andloop connection material (e.g., Velcro), or some other connection meanscan be used instead of or in addition to the magnetically-basedconnection structure. These and other connection structures aredescribed in further detail in commonly owned U.S. Provisional PatentApplication 61/920,705, filed Dec. 24, 2013 and entitled “DynamicallyFlexible, Attachable Device Having an Integral Flexible Display, thedisclosure of which is hereby expressly incorporated by referenceherein.

Further details regarding the first and second substrates 4520, 4524will now be described in connection with FIGS. 63C-63F. With referenceto FIG. 63C, the first substrate 4520 in this example is a substantiallyrectangular metal (e.g., brass, aluminum, copper, steel, tin, nickel)strip that has a slightly concave shape (i.e., a large radius ofcurvature) and is formed as a bi-stable spring, such that the firstsubstrate 4520 can be referred to as being a bi-stable flexible metalstrip. As illustrated in FIG. 63C, the first substrate 4520 has a topside 4550, a bottom side 4554, a pair of opposing ends 4558A, 4558B, alongitudinal axis 4562, and a pair of edges 4566A, 4566B disposedbetween the ends 4558A, 4558B and parallel to the longitudinal axis4562.

As also illustrated in FIG. 63C, the first substrate 4520 includes apair of apertures 4568, a plurality of openings 4570, and a plurality ofprojections 4574. The apertures 4568 each have a circular shape and areformed in the first substrate 4520 at or proximate to the end 4558A. Theopenings 4570 have a generally rectangular shape in cross-section andare generally formed in the first substrate 4520 from one end 4558A ofthe first substrate 4520 to the other end 4558B of the first substrate4520. The plurality of openings 4570 includes openings 4570A formed inor along the edge 4566A of the first substrate 4520 and openings 4570Bformed in or along the edge 4566B of the first substrate 4520 acrossfrom or opposite the openings 4570A. The openings 4570A are evenlyspaced apart from one another and the openings 4570B are evenly spacedapart from one another, although the openings 4570A, 4570B may beunevenly spaced apart from one another if desired. It will beappreciated that as the distance between the apertures 4568 and theopenings 4570A, 4570B increases, the length of the openings 4570A, 4570Bincreases. In other words, the openings 4570A, 4570B positioned furtheraway from the apertures 4568 generally have a greater length than theopenings 4570A, 4570B positioned closer to the apertures 4568. Theplurality of projections 4574 are generally associated with orcorrespond to the openings 4570, respectively. The plurality ofprojections 4574 are generally formed or defined such that each of theprojections 4574 extends outward and downward from the top side 4550 ofthe first substrate 4520 within a respective one of the openings 4570.The plurality of projections 4574 include projections 4574A formed ordefined along the edge 4566A and projections 4574B formed or definedalong the edge 4566B. The projections 4574A are evenly spaced apart fromone another and the projections 4574B are evenly spaced apart from oneanother, although the projections 4574A, 4574B may be unevenly spacedapart from one another if desired. As with the openings 4570A, 4570B, itwill be appreciated that as the distance between the apertures 4568 andthe projections 4574A, 4574B increases, the length of the projections4574A, 4574B increases. In other words, the projections 4574A, 4574Bpositioned further away from the apertures 4568 generally have a greaterlength than the projections 4574A, 4574B positioned closer to theapertures 4568.

FIG. 63D is a close-up view of a portion of the first substrate 4520,showing two openings 4570A, two openings 4570B, two projections 4574A,and two projections 4574B. As illustrated, each projection 4574A, 4574Bhas a generally curved profile, with a first end portion 4575A that iscoupled to and extends outward or away from the top side 4550, a middleportion 4575B that extends downward and outward from the first endportion 4575A and is positioned within a respective one of the openings4570, and a second end portion 4575C, opposite the first end portion4575A, that extends downward from and inward of the middle portion4575B. The second end portion 4575C in this example terminates at aposition substantially below the first substrate 4520 and substantiallyvertically aligned with the first end portion 4575A.

In other embodiments, the first substrate 4520 can vary from the oneillustrated in FIGS. 63C and 63D. The first substrate 4520 can have adifferent shape (e.g., can be substantially or entirely flat, can have amore circular shape, can have an irregular shape, can have a more orless concave shape, can have a convex shape) and/or can have a differentsize. The first substrate 4520 can alternatively be formed as amono-stable flexible strip (i.e., the first substrate 4520 can have onestable position, similar to a tape measure) or as a multi-stableflexible strip having more than two stable positions. The firstsubstrate 4520 can alternatively or additionally be made of one or moredifferent materials, such as, for example, plastic, leather, or cloth.Further yet, the first substrate 4520 can include a different number ofapertures 4568 (e.g., one aperture 4568, four apertures 4568), caninclude differently positioned apertures 4568 (e.g., apertures 4568disposed near or at the end 4558B), and/or can include differentlyconstructed apertures 4568 (e.g., apertures 4568 having a differentlyshaped cross-section). Alternatively, the first substrate 4520 need notinclude the apertures 4568. The first substrate 4520 can include adifferent number of openings 4570 and/or projections 4574, can includedifferently positioned or spaced openings 4570 and/or projections 4574(e.g., openings 4570 and projections 4574 spaced further from the edges4566A, 4566B, openings 4570 and projections 4574 spaced further from orcloser to one another), and/or can include differently constructedopenings 4570 and/or projections 4574. The projections 4574 can, forexample, take the form of tabs, hooks, knobs, bumps, or any othersuitable structure(s). In one example, the projections 4574 can have asubstantially rectangular profile that extends substantially downwardfrom the first substrate 4520. In other examples, the projections 4574can have a profile with more or less curvature. For example, eachprojection 4574 can have a second end portion 4575C that terminates at aposition inward or outward of, rather than substantially verticallyaligned with, the first end portion 4575A.

With reference to FIG. 63E, the second substrate 4524 in this example isa substantially rectangular metal (e.g., brass, aluminum, copper, steel,tin, nickel) strip that has a slightly concave shape (i.e., a largeradius of curvature) and is formed as a bi-stable spring, such that thesecond substrate 4524 may also be referred to herein as a bi-stableflexible metal strip. As illustrated in FIG. 63E, the second substrate4524 has a top side 4580, a bottom side 4582, a pair of opposing ends4584A, 4584B, a longitudinal axis 4586, and a pair of edges 4588A, 4588Bdisposed between the ends 4584A, 4584B and parallel to the longitudinalaxis 4586.

As illustrated in FIG. 63E, the first substrate 4520 includes a pair ofapertures 4590 and a plurality of slots 4594. The apertures 4590 areidentical in shape and size to the apertures 4568 but are formed in thesecond substrate 4524 at or proximate to the end 4584A. The slots 4594are generally formed in the second substrate 4524 from one end 4584A ofthe second substrate 4524 to the other end 4584B of the second substrate4524. The plurality of slots 4594 includes slots 4594A formed in oralong the edge 4588A of the second substrate 4524 and slots 4594B formedin or along the edge 4588B of the second substrate 4524 across from oropposite the slots 4594A. The slots 4594A are evenly spaced apart fromone another and the slots 4594B are evenly spaced apart from oneanother. It will be appreciated that as the distance between theapertures 4590 and the slots 4594A, 4594B increases, the length of theslots 4594A, 4594B increases. In other words, the slots 4594A, 4594Bpositioned further away from the apertures 4590 generally have a greaterlength than the slots 4594A, 4594B positioned closer to the apertures4590. As will be described in greater detail below, the slots 4594generally define or correspond to the most extreme bending that will bepermitted.

FIG. 63F is a close-up view of a portion of the second substrate 4524,showing two of the slots 4594A and two of the slots 4594B. As depicted,each slot 4594A, 4594B has a rectangular-shape in cross-section and iswider than the openings 4570 (i.e., larger in a direction along thelongitudinal axis 4586). Each slot 4594A, 4594B has or defines a firststop surface 4596 and a second stop surface 4598 opposite the first stopsurface 4596. The first stop surface 4596 generally defines orcorresponds to the most extreme bending that will be permitted in theoutward direction when the article 4500 is in the second or curledposition (see FIG. 63B). The second stop surface 4598 generally definesor corresponds to the most extreme bending that will be permitted in theinward direction when the article 4500 is in the first or substantiallyflat position (see FIG. 63A).

In other embodiments, the second substrate 4524 can vary from the oneillustrated in FIGS. 63E and 63F. The second substrate 4524 can have adifferent shape (e.g., can be substantially or entirely flat, can have amore circular shape, can have an irregular shape, can have a more orless concave shape, can have a convex shape) and/or can have a differentsize. In one embodiment, the second substrate 4524 can take the form ofone or more (e.g., two) elongated, narrow strips. The second substrate4524 can alternatively be formed as a mono-stable flexible strip (i.e.,the second substrate 4524 can have one stable position, similar to atape measure) or as a multi-stable flexible strip having more than twostable positions. The second substrate 4524 can alternatively oradditionally be made of one or more different materials, such as, forexample, plastic, leather, or cloth. Further yet, the second substrate4524 can include a different number of apertures 4590 (e.g., oneaperture 4590, four apertures 4590), can include differently positionedapertures 4590 (e.g., apertures 4590 disposed near or at the end 4584B),and/or can include differently constructed apertures 4590 (e.g.,apertures 4590 having a differently shaped cross-section).Alternatively, the second substrate 4524 need not include the apertures4590. The second substrate 4524 can include a different number of slots4594, can include differently positioned or spaced slots 4594 (e.g.,spaced further from the edges 4588A, 4588B, spaced further from orcloser to one another), and/or can include differently constructed slots4594. For example, the slots 4594 can take the form of openings,apertures, tracks, channels, grooves, recesses, or any other suitablestructure(s). As another example, the slots 4594 can be essentiallyidentical in shape and size to the openings 4570.

FIG. 63G depicts the first and second substrates 4520, 4524 aligned withand movably connected or coupled to one another. It will be appreciatedthat the first and second substrates 4520, 4524 have a substantiallysimilar shape and size, such that when the assembled flexible supportstructure 4508 is viewed from the top, the second substrate 4524 issubstantially not visible (with the exception of the projections 4574),while when the flexible support structure 4508 is viewed from thebottom, the first substrate 4520 is substantially not visible. In otherexamples, however, the first and second substrates 4520, 4524 need nothave a substantially similar shape and/or size. For example, one of thefirst and second substrates 4520, 4524 can have the shape illustrated inFIGS. 63C-63F, while the other one of the substrates 4520, 4524 can havea different shape, such as, for example, a substantially or entirelyflat shape. As another example, the second substrate 4524 can have theshape illustrated in FIGS. 63E and 63F, while the first substrate 4520can take the form of one or more narrow, elongated strips movablycoupled to the second substrate 4524.

When the first and second substrates 4520, 4524 are substantiallyaligned with one another as illustrated in FIG. 63G, the apertures 4568of the first substrate 4520 are aligned with the apertures 4590 of thesecond substrate 4524, and the openings 4570 of the first substrate 4520are aligned with the slots 4594 of the second substrate 4524, such thatthe projections 4574 of the first substrate 4520 are movably disposedwithin the slots 4594 of the second substrate 4524. At least someportion of the first substrate 4520 is fixedly attached to at least someportion of the second substrate 4524. In this example, one end 4558A ofthe first substrate 4520 is fixedly attached to a corresponding end4584A of the second substrate 4524 using or via a fastener 4599 (e.g., apin, a rivet, a screw) inserted into each of the aligned pairs ofapertures 4568, 4590. The other ends 4558B, 4584B of the first andsecond substrates 4520, 4524 are thus freely movable relative to oneanother.

In other examples, the apertures 4568, 4590 can be formed or defined indifferent portions of the first and second substrates 4520, 4524, suchthat the first and second substrates 4520, 4524 can be fixedly attachedto one another at different portions. For example, the apertures 4568,4590 can be formed at or near the ends 4558B, 4584B of the first andsecond substrates 4520, 4524, respectively, such that the first andsecond substrates 4520, 4524 can be fixedly attached to one another atthe ends 4558B, 4584B, rather than at the ends 4558A, 4584A. As anotherexample, the apertures 4568, 4590 can be formed at or near a middleportion of the first and second substrates 4520, 4524, such that thefirst and second substrates 4520, 4524 can be fixedly attached to oneanother at or near the middle portion, rather than at the ends 4558A,4584A. In other examples, the first and second substrates 4520, 4524 caninclude more or less apertures 4568, 4590. For example, the firstsubstrate 4520 can include one aperture 4568 and the second substrate4524 can include one aperture 4590, with the first and second substrates4520, 4524 locally fixedly attached to one another at or via theapertures 4568, 4590. Further yet, the first and second substrates 4520,4524 can be welded, adhered (e.g., glued), or otherwise fixedly attachedto one another in a way such that the apertures 4568, 4590 are notnecessary. For example, the apertures 4568, 4590 would not be necessaryif the openings 4570 and the apertures 4590 were identical in shape andsize, as the engagement between the openings 4570 and the apertures 4590would serve to keep the first and second substrates 4520, 4524 together.

FIG. 63H is a close-up view of a portion of the support structure 4508illustrated in FIG. 63G. As noted above, the projections 4574 of thefirst substrate 4520 are movably disposed within the slots 4594 of thesecond substrate 4524. More specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 63H,each projection 4574 is movably disposed between the first and secondstop surfaces 4596, 4598 of a respective slot 4594. Because eachprojection 4574 has a second end portion 4574C that extends below thefirst substrate 4520, each projection 4574 is configured tointerferingly engage or contact the first and second stop surfaces 4596,4598, as will be described below.

It will be appreciated that the first and second substrates 4520, 4524can be movably connected to one another in a different manner. Forexample, the first substrate 4520 and the second substrate 4524 can bereversed, with the first substrate 4520 including the slots 4594 and thesecond substrate 4524 including the projections 4574 movably disposedwithin the slots 4594. The first and second substrates 4520, 4524 can,in some examples, be movably connected to one another in a differentlocation, in multiple locations, and/or using components other than theslots 4594 and the projections 4574 illustrated herein. Any numberand/or combination of fasteners, grooves, tabs, protrusions, ribs,slots, and other components can be used for this/these purpose(s).

In any event, the flexible support 4508, via the interaction betweencorresponding projections 4574 and slots 4594, can limit bending of thearticle 4500, and, more particularly, the flexible display 4204. Becausethe article 4500 is configured for bending in the outward direction, theflexible support 4508 is configured to permit some bending of thearticle 4500, and, more particularly, the flexible display 4204, in theoutward direction but is configured to prevent bending of the flexibledisplay 4204 in the outward direction (indicated by the arrows BOUT inFIG. 63A) beyond its bending limit (e.g., beyond its minimum bendingradius). At the same time, the flexible support 4508 can substantiallylimit bending of the article 4500, and, more particularly, the flexibledisplay 4204, in the inward direction (indicated by the arrows BIN inFIG. 63A). It will thus be appreciated that the flexible support 4508 isconfigured to permit more bending of the article 4500 in the outwarddirection than in the inward direction, but this need not be the case(e.g., the flexible support 4508 can be configured to permit morebending in the inward direction).

When the article 4500 is in the first or substantially flat stableposition (i.e., the position illustrated in FIG. 63A), and the article4500 is bent or curved in the outward direction (indicated by the arrowsin FIG. 63A), the applied bending force causes the projections 4574 ofthe first substrate 4520 to move relative to the slots 4594 of thesecond substrate 4524. Specifically, the applied bending force causeseach projection 4574 to slide away from the second stop surface 4598 andtoward the first stop surface 4596 of a respective slot 4594. At somepoint, the article 4500 will be bent to such a degree that eachprojection 4574 contacts the first stop surface 4596 of a respectiveslot 4594, as depicted in FIG. 63I. At this point, the article 4500 hasreached its pre-defined bending limit and any further bending of thearticle 4500, particularly the flexible display 4204, in the outwarddirection is prevented. This position also corresponds to the second orcurled stable position of the article 4500 (see FIG. 63B), such that thearticle 4500 cannot be bent or curved beyond the second stable position,though that need not be the case (e.g., a limited amount of bending canbe permitted beyond the second or curled stable position).

When the article 4500 is in the first or substantially flat stableposition (i.e., the position illustrated in FIG. 63A), and the article4500 is bent or curved in the inward direction, the applied bendingforce causes the projections 4574 of the first substrate 4520 to moverelative to the slots 4594 of the second substrate 4524. Specifically,the applied bending force causes each projection 4574 to slide away fromthe first stop surface 4596 and toward the second stop surface 4598 of arespective slot 4594. At some point, the article 4500 will be bent tosuch a degree (i.e., corresponding to the maximum bending amount in thisdirection) that each projection 4574 contacts the second stop surface4598 of a respective slot 4594, as depicted in FIG. 63J. At this point,the article 4500 has reached its pre-defined bending limit and anyfurther bending of the article 4500, particularly the flexible display4204, in the inward direction is prevented.

The flexible support structure 4508 can, like the flexible supportstructure 4208, also provide torsion control. More specifically, theflexible support structure 4508 can, by virtue of having two substrates4520, 4524 movably connected to one another and the slots 4594 and theprojections 4574 being positioned along or in the edges 4566A, 4566B and4588A, 4588B, respectively, can substantially resist or prevent torsionfrom being applied to the longitudinal sides of the article 4500, and,thus, the flexible display 4204. At the very least, the flexible supportstructure 4508 described herein will substantially reduce the amount oftorsion that can be applied to the article 4500, and, thus, the flexibledisplay 4204. It will be appreciated that the flexible support structure4508 can thus help to prevent the damage to the brittle layers of theflexible display 4204 that would otherwise be caused by torsion appliedto the article 4500. It will be appreciated that the width and/or lengthof the projections 4574 and the slots 4594, and/or the spacing betweenthe projections 4574 and the slots 4594 can be varied, yet the flexiblesupport structure 4508 can still provide at least some level of torsioncontrol. In some of these cases, the width, length, and/or spacing canbe varied such that the flexible support structure 4508 provides lessresistance to torsion, and thus permits more bending in the transversedirection.

FIGS. 64A and 64B illustrate other examples of dynamically flexiblearticles 4800 and 4900, respectively.

The article 4800 illustrated in FIG. 64A takes the form of a flexiblelight or lamp. The article 4800 includes a flexible electronic component4804 and a flexible support structure 4808 coupled to the flexibleelectronic component 4804 via an interlayer (not illustrated), such as,for example, the interlayer 4206. The flexible electronic component 4804is similar to the flexible electronic component 4204, but is an organiclight-emitting diode (OLED) light instead of a flexible display. Asillustrated in FIG. 64A, the flexible electronic component 4804 iscoupled (e.g., mounted) to a ceiling 4812. In other examples, theflexible electronic component 4804 can be a different component and/orneed not be coupled to the ceiling 4812 (e.g., the component 4804 can beheld by a user, the component 4804 can be coupled to or disposed on adifferent surface). Like the display 4204, the flexible OLED light 4804is dynamically bendable or flexible based on, for example, the lightingneeds for the environment in which the flexible electronic component4804 is disposed. As such, the flexible OLED light 4804 can have anynumber of various configurations. Unlike the bi-stable flexible supportstructures 4208, 4508, the flexible support structure 4808 has more thantwo bending positions (i.e., the flexible support structure 4808 is amulti-stable support structure). The flexible support structure 4808 cannonetheless include the features of any of the flexible supportstructures described herein (e.g., the flexible support structure 4208,4508, 708), such that the flexible support 4808, like the other supportstructures described herein, is configured to limit bending of thearticle 4800 and/or resist torsion applied to the article 4800.

The article 4900 illustrated in FIG. 64B includes a base 4902, aflexible electronic component 4904, and a flexible support structure4908. The flexible electronic component 4904 is partially disposedwithin and extends outward from the base 4902. The flexible supportstructure 4908 is coupled to the flexible electronic component 4904 viaan interlayer (not illustrated), such as, for example, the interlayer4106. The flexible electronic component 4904 is similar to the flexibleelectronic component 4204, but is a collapsible e-reader. Like thedisplay 4204, the flexible electronic component 4904 is dynamicallybendable or flexible between, for example, the open or substantiallyflat in-use position depicted in FIG. 64B and a folded or closedposition (not illustrated) in which the flexible electronic component4904 is folded over and around an exterior surface of the base 4902.Like the flexible support structure 4808, the flexible support structure4908 has more than two bending positions. The flexible support structure4908 can nonetheless include the features of any of the flexible supportstructures described herein (e.g., the flexible support structure 4208,4508, 4808), such that the flexible support 4908, like the other supportstructures described herein, is configured to limit bending of thearticle 4900 and/or resist torsion applied to the article 4900.

FIG. 65 illustrates a block diagram of various electronic components,referred to herein as an electronics suite 38, that may be used in ordisposed in the electronics module 19 of any of the attachable articlesdescribed herein to drive a flexible electronic component (e.g., theflexible display 18) of an article (e.g., the dynamically flexible,attachable article or device 10). In particular, the electronics suite38 illustrated in FIG. 65 includes a battery 40 that powers a number ofother modules or electronic components including a microprocessor orother processor 42, a computer readable memory 44, which may be, forexample, a flash memory or other suitable type of non-transitory,tangible, data storage medium, a communication module 46, a displaydriver 48, a touch screen controller 50 and a number of sensors 52 andother secondary devices 53. The sensors 52 may include, for example, animpact sensor or step counter, one or more gyroscopic sensors orgyroscopes, temperature sensors, vibration sensors, pulse rate monitors,pressure sensors, strain gauges, etc. For example, the sensors 52 mayinclude any number of any number of types of sensors, such as straingauges, gyroscopes, accelerometers, compression sensors, tensionalstrain sensors, positional sensors, motion or movement sensors, pressuresensors, vibration sensors, temperature sensors, orientation sensors,gravity sensors, light sensors, and piezoelectric sensors, to name afew. The secondary electronic devices 53 may include, for example, analarm or noise creation device, a speaker, a microphone, a vibrator theoperation of which causes the clasp 14 or electronics module 19 tovibrate, etc. Although FIG. 65 illustrates the sensors 52 and thesecondary electronic devices 53 as being integral with the electronicssuite 38, in some cases, one or more of the sensors 52 and/or thesecondary electronic devices 53 are physically disposed at one or moreother locations along the band 12 separate from the remainder of theelectronics suite 38. In these cases, though, the separately disposedsensors 52 and/or secondary electronic devices 53 remain incommunicative connection with the remainder of the electronics suite 38(e.g., via a wired or wireless connection).

Similarly, although FIG. 65 illustrates the display driver 48 as beingintegral with the electronics suite 38, in some cases, the displaydriver 48 is physically disposed at another location separate from theremainder of the electronics suite 38. In an example, the display driver48 is disposed in a location that is proximate to the electrodes orconnectors of the pixel elements of the flexible electronic component,e.g., on the backplane of the flexible electronic component or at someother suitable location. The separately located display driver 48,though, remains in communicative connection with the remainder of theelectronics suite 38 (e.g., via a wired or wireless connection) despiteof the remote locations.

As will be understood, the memory 44, the communication module 46, thedisplay driver 48 and the touch screen controller 50, as well as thesensors 52 and other secondary electronic devices 53, arecommunicatively connected to the processor 42 and may operate to performvarious functions in conjunction with applications or other programsimplemented by the processor 42. Still further, each of these elementsis connected to and is powered by the battery 40 in any known or desiredmanner. Still further, the electronics suite 38 of FIG. 65 may includeone or more communication ports, such as communication port 54 (e.g., aUSB or other type of digital communication port) and a power or batterycharger input port 56. In this case, the power input port 56 may beconnected to the battery 40 and enable charging or recharging of thebattery 40 using any known or desired recharging circuitry andmethodology. Alternatively or in addition, the communications input port54 (in the form of for example, a USB input port) may be connected tothe battery 40 and provide power to the battery 40 for charging battery40, and the input port 54 may also be connected to the microprocessor42, as well as to the communication circuit module 46, for performingwired-based communications via the input port 54. Of course, thecommunication input port 54, while being illustrated as a USB-typeconnection, could any other type of known wired or physicalcommunication connection, including any desired serial or paralleldigital communication port using any number of pins or wires, as isknown in the art, an analog communication port, etc. Additionally oralternatively, the input port 54 may include a wireless input port forperforming wireless communications.

In an embodiment, the power input port 56 may be a wireless input portfor powering the article 10, and in this case may, for example, be partof a battery charger unit that operates to charge the battery 40 using,for example, an inductively coupled charging technique. If the batterycharger unit is part of an inductively coupled charging system, itgenerally responds to electromagnetic waves produced by an exteriorcharging unit (not shown) to charge the battery 40 when the attachablearticle 10 is disposed near the external charging unit. In another case,the battery charger of the input port 56 may be a kinetic energy chargerunit that converts motion of the dynamically flexible device (such asthat associated with movement of an arm when the dynamically flexibledevice is in the form of a wristband) into electrical energy which isprovided to charge the battery 40.

As will be understood, the processor 42, which may be a programmable,general-purpose processor or a specially programmed processor programmedusing any desired type of hardware or firmware programming, generallycoordinates and implements the operation of the flexible electroniccomponent and the associated electronic components as described in moredetail herein. The computer readable memory 44 stores variousapplications, including for example the general operating systemimplemented by the processor 42, and various applications (illustratedas a set of applications 60 in FIG. 65) to be run on the processor 42 toimplement various different types of functionality via the dynamicallyflexible device, some of which will be described in more detail herein.The memory 44 may also store one or more data files 62, which may be,for example, image or video data files associated with various images tobe displayed on the display screen 18 at various different times. Stillfurther, the memory 44 may store application data that may be created bythe various applications 60 or the microprocessor 42 as part of theoperation of various applications 60 and to be used by thoseapplications 60 either during runtime of the applications 60 or at othertimes. If desired, the microprocessor 42 or one of the secondaryelectronic components 53 may include or be a clock that tracks thecurrent time, day, date, month, year, time zone, etc.

As an example, one or more of the applications 60 may implement variousfunctionalities typically associated with standard computers or othertypes of electronic devices such as personal handheld electronicdevices, including for example an e-mail application, an Internet orweb-browsing application, an alarm clock application, a calendarapplication, a music-playing application such as an MP3 application, avideo application, a digital picture slideshow application, a mappingapplication, an e-reading application which may provide books, notes,magazines or other types of articles, for reading by the user, etc.Still further, one or more of the applications 60 may operate on theprocessor 42 to turn the flexible electronic component associated withthe dynamically flexible, attachable device into a slave display devicethat may be tied to or communicably coupled to an exterior master devicethat is generating content to be displayed via the flexible electroniccomponent. The master device, which may be a smart phone or a nearbycomputer device, may be wirelessly connected to the electronics suite 38to provide content to be displayed on the flexible electronic componentand will typically have more memory, and computing and processing powerthan the processor 42.

The communication module 46 of FIG. 65 may include or use any type ofcommunication hardware/software/firmware that uses any desired types ofcommunication techniques to enable the microprocessor 42 to communicatewith exterior devices or sources. Of course, the communication module 46could include multiple different types of communicationhardware/software/firmware, including any kind of hardwire-basedcommunication module or wireless-based communication module. Asexamples, the communication module 46 may be a wired or wirelessInternet-based communication module that may provide wired orwireless-based, IP protocol communications between the dynamicallyflexible, attachable article or device and other devices or acommunication network such as a LAN or a WAN to which other devices arecommunicatively connected. Likewise, the communication module 46 mayinclude a near field communications (NFC) module, a radio frequencyidentification (RFID) communications module for communicating with,sending messages to and/or receiving messages from RFID tags stored inother devices around or close to the dynamically flexible device. Inthis case, the communications module 46 may decode signals received fromRFID tags in response to pings by the RFID communication module 46 toidentify the RFID tags or tag numbers (identifiers) associated withthese devices. Likewise, the communication module 46 may be a near fieldcommunication (NFC) module or a Bluetooth communication module, whichmay perform near field communications or Bluetooth communications in anyknown or desired manner with nearby NFC or Bluetooth enabled devices,thereby enabling wireless communication between the dynamically flexibledevice and other closely situated or closely located electronic devices.Still further, the communications module 46 may include a USB or othertype of wired communication module for decoding and encoding USB-basedcommunication signals to be sent out and received via the USBcommunication port 54.

As illustrated in FIG. 65, the display driver 48 is coupled to themicroprocessor 42 and to the flexible electronic component, and drivesthe flexible electronic component to present different images to a userand thus implement functionality via the flexible electronic component.The display driver 48 may be associated with or use any type of displaydriver technology associated with the various different types offlexible displays that might be used, including, for example, e-ink orother bi-stable display drivers, organic light emitting diode (OLED)display drivers, etc. Of course, it will be understood that the displaydriver 48 is connected to the various pixel elements or pixels of theflexible electronic component to cause the pixel elements to changetheir visual appearance so as to present content image on the flexibleelectronic component. Typically, but not necessarily, each pixel elementis communicatively connected to two electrodes, lead lines, connectinglines, or connectors corresponding the (x, y) coordinates of theparticular pixel element on the flexible electronic component. Thus, thedisplay driver 48 provides image content (e.g., by using electricalsignals or other suitable signals) to a set of connecting linescorresponding to a width of the flexible electronic component or itsdisplay area (and, in some cases, physically emanating from a width edgeor transverse side of the flexible electronic component to the driver48), and the same display driver 48 may provide image content (e.g., byusing electrical signals or other suitable signals) to another set ofconnecting lines corresponding to a length of the flexible electroniccomponent (and, in some cases, physically emanating from a length edgeor longitudinal side of the flexible electronic component to connect tothe driver 48). In an example, the display driver 48 provides imagecontent to a set of transverse connecting lines and/or to a set oflongitudinal connecting lines so that image content is presented on thedisplay area of the flexible display. In an example, the article 10includes multiple display drivers 48, each of which provides imagecontent to a respective set of connecting lines.

Returning to FIG. 65, the display driver 48 illuminates or causes thepixel elements to obtain or reach a color, a lighting level, an on-offstate, etc., so as to drive the flexible electronic component to presentvarious images and other functionality as determined by the particularapplication 60 being executed on the microprocessor 42. In some cases,the display driver 48 may cause various images, such as one or moreartistic renditions, patterns, etc. or other types of images stored inthe memory 44 to be displayed as one of the images 62 on the flexibleelectronic component. Such an image may be any type of graphic elementin the form of artwork, an indication of an association of the user witha particular university or other organization, such as a logo, a mascot,an icon, etc. In the case of a static display, and particularly when theflexible electronic component is a bi-stable type of flexible display,such as an e-ink type of display, the flexible electronic componentmight display a particular image or background image whenever thedynamically flexible device is in a sleep mode, and thus in which thedisplay driver 48 is not operating to actively drive the flexibleelectronic component.

Of course, the touch screen controller 50 is connected to a touch screeninterface 26, if such an interface exists, and receives input signalsfrom the touch screen interface 26. The controller 50 operates to decodethese input signals to identify touch events that occur with respect tothe touch screen interface 26. The touch screen interface 26 may be acapacitive touch screen interface or any other suitable type of touchscreen interface disposed over the flexible electronic component, andmay be transparent in nature to thus enable the pixel elements of theflexible electronic component to be viewable through the touch screeninterface 26. Of course, other types of touch screen interfaces may beused instead or as well. In any event, the touch screen controller 50operates to energize and control the touch screen interface 26, as wellas to recognize and decode touch screen events to identify, for example,the location of each touch screen event, a type of a touch screen event,such as a tap or a swipe movement, etc. If desired, the touch screencontroller 50 alone or in conjunction with the processor 42 may operateto determine or recognize gestures that are input via the touch screeninterface 26, such gestures being, for example, a slide, a swipe, amulti-finger pinch or any other type of gesture that includes one ormore finger movements coordinated with one another. Each such gesturemay indicate an action to be taken on or via the dynamically flexibledevice. Of course, the dynamically flexible, attachable article ordevice may include other or different types of user input devicesconfigured to detect user-generated gestures, such as interfaces thatinclude buttons switches, roller balls, slide bars, pressure sensors,strain gauges, etc., disposed on, for example, one of the clasps 14 orelsewhere along the band 12. Such user interfaces may enable the user toperform more rudimentary functions, such as scrolling movements, on-offpowering movements, mode switching, etc. that are traditionally enteredvia actuate-able buttons or switches. In one case, the processor maydetermine, based on input from the user via the touchscreen, such as aset up program, a calibration program or a stored user preference,whether the band is disposed on a left wrist or a right wrist of a userand thus determine the relative positioning or orientation of images tobe displayed on the flexible electronic component so that they are bestviewable by the user.

As previously discussed, the sensors 52 may include any of variousdifferent types of sensors. In an embodiment, the sensors 52 may includeone or more gyroscopes which detect movement of or the orientation ofthe band 12, rapid shaking of the band 12, etc. One or more of thesetypes of movements may be considered to be a particular type of input oruser input, such as a gesture to reset the dynamically flexible device,to change a mode of the dynamically flexible device, etc. Likewise, theoutput of such gyroscopes can be used by the microprocessor 42 todetermine the orientation or direction of the flexible display 18 toenable the microprocessor 42, or an application 60 executed on themicroprocessor 42, to determine the proper orientation of the image tobe displayed on the flexible display 18. In some instances, such motiondetection and position detection devices might be located in two or moreof the fasteners 14 or other electronics modules 19, to enable thedynamically flexible device to more accurately determine whether thedevice is oriented around a wrist or other circular member or whether itis instead laid out flat or oriented in some other manner. Themicroprocessor 42 or an application executed thereon may changefunctionality, behavior, and/or actions of the dynamically flexibledevice based on the detected orientation of the band 12.

In some cases, the sensors 52 include one or more pressure or forcesensors and/or strain gauges which detect pressure, strain, or similarforces that are considered to be an input to cause the functionality,behavior, and/or actions of the dynamically flexible device to change,e.g., reset the device 10, change a mode of the device, change apresentation displayed on the flexible electronic component (e.g., thedisplay 18) of a dynamically flexible device (e.g., the device 10), etc.In one example, two pressure or force sensors are positioned on orattached to the band 12 (e.g., as part of the backplane of the flexible18 or as part of the support 16 so that when the dynamically flexibledevice 10 is attached to itself in a generally circular or loopedconfiguration, the pressure or force sensors are diametrically opposedto each other.

To illustrate, FIG. 66A includes an example looped configuration of adynamically, flexible attachable device 10 including a band to which twopairs of pressure sensors 500A, 500B and 504A, 504B are attached, wherethe respective sensors of each pressure sensor pair 500, 504 arediametrically opposed. When a user squeezes or applies force or pressureto the band 12, for example, simultaneously at two or more points alongthe band 12, this action is detected by the pressure sensors 500A, 500B,504A, 504B as an input, and the pressure sensors 500A, 500B, 504A, 504Bsend corresponding signals to the processor 42 (not shown in FIGS.66A-66C) in response to the detection of the input. Based on the signalsreceived from the pressure sensors 500A, 500B, 504A, and 504B, theprocessor 42 determines any actions and/or behavior to be taken by thedevice 10 as a result of the input, and causes the resulting behavior(if any are determined) to occur, e.g., by executing one or morecorresponding applications 60. FIG. 66B illustrates the band 12 of FIG.66A being squeezed simultaneously at locations proximate to the fastener14 and at a diametrically opposite point of the band 12, and FIG. 66Cillustrates the band 12 of FIG. 66A being squeezed along an axisperpendicular to the axis of applied force in FIG. 66B. Of course, theuser may squeeze the band 12 at any two or more locations along the band12, and by judicious placement of multiple sensors along the band 12,the location(s) along the band 12 at which the user applied thesqueezing force are able to be determined by the processor 42 from theoutputs of the sensors.

Different locations of squeezing along the band 12 of the flexibledevice 10 may correspond to different desired functionality, actions,modes and/or behaviors. For example, a detected squeeze along a firstdiametric axis proximate to the fastener 14 may indicate that the device10 is to be turned off, whereas a detected squeeze along another axismay indicate that a particular application 60 stored in the memory 44 isto be launched.

In some cases, for a given axis of applied force, different signalsgenerated by a same pressure sensor correspond to different degrees ofdetected force, and thus to different behaviors. For example, a squeezeof a significant force (e.g., so that both sides of the loop almosttouch) that is applied over a pre-defined time duration may indicatethat the device 10 is to be turned off, whereas a series of lessforceful squeezes at the same location(s) may control a speaker volume.In some cases, a resulting behavior of the device 10 is based on adifferential between the respective magnitudes of the forces detected atmultiple sensors. For instance, if one pressure sensor detects asignificantly larger force than another pressure sensor, this conditionmay be indicative of the device 10 being dropped rather than a userintentionally squeezing the device 10 to elicit a desired behavior oraction.

In an embodiment, particular actions that are to be performed by thedevice 10 are based on types of squeezes or applied forces to the band12 (e.g., particular magnitudes, locations, durations, and/or numbers ofsqueezes or applied forces to the band 12). The mappings between type ofapplied forces and desired resultant device behavior or action may beconfigurable. For example, the user may change one or more mappingsdirectly at the band 12 via a user interface of the device 10, or theuser may cause mapping changes to be downloaded into the memory 44 ofthe device 10. Of course, all detection and action recognition may beperformed by appropriate software running in the processor of the devicebased on the signals provided by the sensors 500, 504.

FIG. 67 illustrates a surface view of a portion of an exampleconfiguration of the dynamically flexible, attachable device 10 thatincludes one or more strain gauges 520 attached to or included in theband 12 (e.g., on the support 16 or the backplane of the flexibledisplay 18). In FIG. 67, the generally rectangular-shaped strain gauge520 is oriented in parallel with the orientation of therectangular-shaped band 12. In particular, the strain gauge 520 ispositioned so that a direction or axis 522 along which forces aredetected by the gauge 520 is parallel to a longitudinal axis of the band12. Further, the strain gauge 520 is a unidirectional gauge in whichforces along one dimension 522 (e.g., tension 522A or compression 522B)are detected, and signals corresponding to the detected forces (e.g.,electrical signals) are transmitted via one more connection pads 525,e.g., to the processor 42 (not shown). Forces in another dimension 528remain undetected or are ignored by the unidirectional gauge 520. Insome cases, the strain gauge 520 is included in a pressure sensorincluded in the device 10.

FIG. 68 illustrates a side view of an example configuration of thedynamically flexible, attachable device 10 that includes two straingauges 530A, 530B positioned on opposite faces of the band 12. Theexample configuration of FIG. 68 may or may not be integral with theexample configuration shown in FIG. 67, e.g., the gauges 530A, 530B mayor may not be instances of the gauge 520. As shown in FIG. 68, the band12 has been squeezed so that the portion of the band 12 including thestrain gauges 530A, 530B is curved, and as such, gauge 530A detectstension forces 532A and gauge 530B detects compression forces 532B. Thegauges 530A, 530B send signals corresponding to the magnitude of therespectively detected forces 532 to the processor 42 (not shown) so thatthe processor 42 may determine the appropriate action or behavior of thedevice 10, e.g., by executing an application 60. The device 10 mayinclude more than one pair of gauges 530A, 530Bb disposed at variouslocations on the band 12, e.g., attached to or as part of the flexiblesupport 16 or a substrate of the flexible display 18. In FIG. 68, thestrain gauges 530A, 530B are shown as extending from the surfaces of theband 12, however, in some embodiments, the strain gauges 530A, 530B donot extend from the surfaces of the band 12, but instead are positionedwithin the band 12 between its surfaces.

In FIGS. 67 and 68, the strain gauges 520, 530A and 530Bb areillustrated as unidirectional strain gauges configured to detect and/orsend signals corresponding to forces in only one direction. In somecases (not shown), a strain gauge included in the device 10 is amulti-directional strain gauge configured to detect multi-directionalforces. In an example, if a user contorts the device 10 to a point thatmay not be tolerated by the flexible display 18 (e.g., by twisting theband torsionally, stretching the band in one or more directions, etc.),this contortion is detected by multidimensional strain gauges andreported to the processor 42, which then may cause a warning or otheralert to be presented on the flexible display 18 or at another userinterface (e.g., an auditory alert). On the other hand, a twisting orstretching the band to a tolerated but not excessive degree maycorrespond to yet another input detected by the multidimensional straingauges to cause a respective action or behavior of the device 10. Ofcourse, any number of strain gauges or other sensors may be disposed atany positions along the band 12 (and on either the upper surface orlower surface of the band 12 if desired) to detect pressures at anypoint along the band 12 or a multiple different points along the band12.

Referring back to FIG. 65, in some devices, the sensors 52 may includestep counters or an impact-sensor like and accelerometer, which might beused to count the number of steps a user takes over a particular periodtime. Alternatively or in addition, the sensors 52 may include one ormore temperature sensors, which may detect the ambient temperature, thetemperature of the skin of the user when the device 10 is being worn,etc. The sensors 52 could also include a blood-pressure sensor device,which might check blood pressure or heart rate using known exteriorblood-pressure sensor device technology.

As will be understood, the various different electronic devices orcomponents disposed in or shown in the electronic suite 38 of FIG. 65may be used in conjunction with one another in various different mannersto provide a whole host of functionality for the dynamically flexible,attachable article or device 10, which might be beneficial in variousdifferent uses of that article. However, only some of these uses aredescribed in detail herein.

In a general sense, the flexible display 18 of any or all of theembodiments described herein may be manufactured as any type of flexibledisplay, such as an e-paper display, an organic light emitting diode(OLED) display, etc. and this flexible display, once manufactured, maythen be formed, curved or bent in various manners. Generally speaking,flexible display 18 may be made of two flexible substrates including abackplane flexible substrate and frontplane flexible substrate placedback to back, next to one another, or laminated onto each other. In thecase of e-paper, an additional layer of material such as an adhesive maybe included in the frontplane and disposed between the backplane and thefrontplane. In some cases, such as with the use of active-matrix OLEDs,electrophoretic displays (EPDs), e-paper, electronic ink displays,e-reader displays, liquid-crystal displays (LCDs), or otheractive-matrix type displays, the backplane includes a plurality ofsemiconductor devices or elements, e.g., an array of transistors and/orother elements, disposed thereon for driving or providing energizationto individual lighting, transmitting, or reflective elements disposed ina similar array on the frontplane or on top of the transistors and/orother elements. The semiconductor devices or elements may be formed onthe backplane in any known or desired manner, such as by etching, dyecut forming, printing, sputtering, spin-coating, spray coating, otherdeposition or patterning techniques, or combinations thereof, etc.Likewise, the light emitting, transmitting, or reflective elements maybe formed as any desired types of light emitting, transmitting, orreflective elements using these same or different techniques, and theelements may include light emitting diodes (LEDs), OLEDs, e-paper,liquid crystal, etc. In the case of e-paper, for example, the frontplaneand the backplane may be formed with black and white, oppositely chargedparticles suspended in a clear fluid which, when put in an electricfield, will cause the black or the white particles to drift to the topof the display to create a white state, a black state, or anintermediate grey state. In any case, the substrate of the backplane andthe frontplane may be formed of the same material or of a differentflexible material, such as plastic or flexible glass, and thesematerials may have the same or different flexibility properties, as longas both materials are able to flex to the curvature needed for bendingthe electronic display 18.

More particularly, the flexible displays illustrated herein, may bemanufactured as a flexible display, such as an e-paper display, anorganic light emitting diode (OLED) display, etc. Generally speaking,the flexible displays may be constructed on two flexible substrates, ormay be constructed on one flexible substrate but having at least twoflexible substrates. The flexible substrates may include a backplanedisplay area and frontplane display area placed back to back, next toone another, or laminated onto each other. The frontplane display areacomprises an array of optic elements (e.g., electro-optic elements)provided on a first flexible substrate that are capable of displaying animage, while the backplane display area comprises an array ofsemiconductor devices or elements (e.g., transistor elements) providedon a second flexible substrate for driving or providing energization tothe optic elements on the frontplane. Materials suitable for use as theflexible substrate for either the frontplane and/or the backplaneinclude, but are not limited to, various plastic substrates such aspolyimide, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polycarbonate,polyethersulfone, polyether ether ketone (PEEK), and polyethylenenaphthalate (PEN). Metallic foils or flexible glass also may be used.

Preferably, the backplane display area comprises an array of thin filmtransistors (TFTs) provided on a flexible, plastic substrate such asPET. The TFT array may include switching and/or driving TFTs, andadditional elements such as storage capacitors, and interconnect wiring.An individual TFT element generally is made by successive deposition andpatterning of conductor (i.e., source, drain, and gate electrodes),insulator (i.e., dielectric) and semiconductor thin film layers. Theactive semiconductor layer can be composed of either organic(small-molecule or polymeric semiconductors) or inorganic materials(such as amorphous silicon, low-temperature polycrystalline silicon,graphene, carbon nanotube, and metal oxide semiconductors).

The TFT array may preferably comprise organic TFTs (OTFTs) based upon anorganic semiconductor described in at least one of U.S. Pat. No.6,585,914; U.S. Pat. No. 6,608,323; U.S. Pat. No. 6,991,749; U.S. Pat.No. 7,374,702; U.S. Pat. No. 7,528,176; U.S. Pat. No. 7,569,693; U.S.Pat. No. 7,605,225; U.S. Pat. No. 7,671,202; U.S. Pat. No. 7,816,480;U.S. Pat. No. 7,842,198; U.S. Pat. No. 7,892,454; U.S. Pat. No.7,893,265; U.S. Pat. No. 7,902,363; U.S. Pat. No. 7,947,837; U.S. Pat.No. 7,982,039; U.S. Pat. No. 8,022,214; U.S. Pat. No. 8,329,855; U.S.Pat. No. 8,404,844; U.S. Pat. No. 8,440,828; U.S. Patent Publication No.2010/0252112; U.S. Patent Publication No. 2010/0283047; U.S. PatentPublication No. 2010/0326527; U.S. Patent Publication No. 2011/0120558;U.S. Patent Publication No. 2011/0136333; and U.S. Patent PublicationNo. 2013/0062598, the disclosure of each of which is incorporated byreference herein in its entirety for all purposes. While OTFTs mayinclude metallic contacts and a dielectric layer composed of siliconoxide (SiO₂) or another inorganic oxide or nitride (such as Al₂O₃, HfO₂,SiO₂, or Si₃N₄), a dielectric layer composed of an electricallyinsulating polymer may be preferred. Exemplary polymeric dielectricmaterials include polyacrylates, polyimides, polyvinyl alcohol,polystyrene, polyester, polycarbonate, polyhaloethylene, epoxy resins,siloxane polymers, benzocyclobutene-based polymers. Other polymericdielectrics are described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,605,394; U.S. Pat. No.7,981,989; U.S. Pat. No. 8,093,588; U.S. Pat. No. 8,274,075; U.S. Pat.No. 8,338,555; U.S. Patent Publication No. 2011/0175089; U.S. PatentPublication No. 2011/0215334; and U.S. Patent Publication No.2012/0068314. Conductive polymers such aspoly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) poly(styrenesulfonate) (PEDOT:PSS) maybe used as alternative materials for metallic contacts in OTFTs.

Preferably, the TFT array may comprise metal oxide TFTs based upon ametal oxide semiconductor. For example, the metal oxide semiconductorcan be selected from various mixed oxides including one or more ofindium, zinc, tin, and gallium such as indium zinc oxide (IZO), zinc tinoxide (ZTO), indium gallium oxide (IGO), and indium gallium zinc oxide(IGZO). In a more preferred embodiment, the TFT array may comprise IGZOTFTs. While state-of-the art IGZO TFTs usually include thick layers ofinorganic materials such as SiO₂, SiO_(x), Si₃N₄, and SiO_(x)N_(y) asdielectric and passivation layers, it is preferred that if the TFT arraybackplane comprises metal oxide TFTs, organic materials are used in atleast some of the dielectric and passivation layers, such that thethickness of the remaining inorganic layer(s) may be reduced to allowmaximum flexibility of the TFT array as whole. Metal oxide TFTsincorporating one or more organic layers are described in U.S. Pat. No.8,017,458; U.S. Pat. No. 8,097,877; U.S. Pat. No. 8,395,150; and U.S.Patent Publication No. 2012/0223314, the disclosure of each of which isincorporated by reference herein in its entirety for all purposes.

In some scenarios, such as for an electrophoretic or e-reader display,the frontplane display area may be laminated, sealed to, or otherwisesecured onto the backplane display area. The frontplane display area maybe produced by forming a subassembly that comprises, in sequence, aflexible substrate, a conductive electrode layer, an electro-opticlayer, and optionally, an adhesive layer to allow lamination to thebackplane. In the case of an OLED display, the electro-optic layer issandwiched between two electrode layers and is typically built on theTFT array. Generally, at least one of the two electrode layers istransparent, often composed of a transparent conductive oxide such asindium tin oxide (ITO). The electro-optic layer is composed of anorganic material capable of emitting light when a voltage is appliedacross the two electrode layers. The organic light-emitting material mayhave a stacked structure including a plurality of different organiclayers. In addition to one or more emissive layers, the stackedstructure may include additional layers such as a hole-injection layer,a hole-transport layer, an electron-transport layer, a hole-blockinglayer, and/or an electron-blocking layer to enhance device performance.Individual OLED elements may have different emitters (for example, a redemitter, a green emitter, or a blue emitter) in their emissive layer toprovide a colored image. Exemplary OLED device structures and materialsare described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,707,745, 5,844,363, 6,097,147,6,303,238, and 8,334,545, the disclosure of each of which isincorporated by reference herein in its entirety for all purposes.

In the case of an e-paper display, the electro-optic layer may becomposed of an encapsulated electrophoretic medium. The encapsulatedelectrophoretic medium generally comprises numerous small capsules, eachof which itself comprises an internal phase containingelectrophoretically-mobile (e.g., black and/or white) particlessuspended in a liquid suspending medium, and a capsule wall surroundingthe internal phase. Typically, the capsules are themselves held within apolymeric binder to form a coherent layer positioned between twoelectrode layers. Most commonly, one electrode layer has the form of asingle continuous electrode, while the other electrode layer ispatterned into a matrix of pixel electrodes, each of which defines onepixel of the display. Electronic charges are applied to the capsules tobring particles of a selected color to the surface. Electrophoreticmedia and related display device structures are described in, forexample, U.S. Pat. No. 5,930,026; U.S. Pat. No. 6,831,769; U.S. Pat. No.6,839,158; and U.S. Pat. No. 7,170,670, the disclosure of each of whichis incorporated by reference herein in its entirety for all purposes. Inaddition to electrophoretic displays, other e-paper display technologiesinclude electrowetting displays, and electrofluidic displays asdescribed in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 7,446,945 and U.S. Pat. No.8,111,465, the disclosure of each of which is incorporated by referenceherein in its entirety for all purposes.

To integrate the TFT array backplane with the frontplane for a completeddisplay system, the bottom or pixel electrode of the frontplane is(connected) to the drain or source electrode of the switching TFT in ane-paper display, and the driving TFT in an active matrix OLED (AMOLED)display.

Various organic layers on either the frontplane and/or the backplane maybe formed on the flexible substrate by solution-phase depositiontechniques such as spin-coating, slot coating, die coating, printing(e.g., inkjet printing, screen printing, pad printing, offset printing,gravure printing, flexographic printing, lithographic printing,mass-printing and the like), spray coating, electrospray coating, dropcasting, dip coating, and blade coating. Inorganic (e.g., metallic ormetal oxide) layers usually are deposited by physical or chemical vapordeposition methods (e.g., sputtering), but may be solution-processed ifa soluble precursor is available. The layers may be patterned intospecific elements by photolithography, either by use of the intrinsicphotosensitivity of the layers (e.g., certain polymeric layers) or byuse of a photoresist (e.g., metallic, metal oxide, or small-moleculeorganic layers).

Moreover, it may be desirable to manufacture the flexible display 18 ina manner that maximizes the amount of the display area space viewable onthe top layer of the device 10, i.e., that is viewable on the band 12.In this regard, FIG. 69 illustrates a base or backplane layer of aflexible display 18 as manufactured. Generally speaking, the backplaneof a flexible display 18 comprises a flat surface, or a first displaysubstrate, and has a display area with various electrical energizingelements (e.g., transistors) formed, printed, etched or otherwisedisposed thereon. As is known, the electronically energizing componentson the backplane substrate of a backplane component are then operativelyconnected to electronically energizable components, such as organiclight emitting diodes (OLEDs), encapsulated electrophoretic media (e.g.,as in an e-paper display), etc., disposed on or formed on a frontplanecomponent. Both the backplane substrate of the backplane component andthe frontplane substrate of the frontplane component are flexible, andthe backplane substrate and the frontplane substrate are aligned toprovide a register between various energizing components and energizablecomponents to thereby form pixels on the display area. In particular,the flexible display may be made of two or more layers including abackplane display substrate on which various display elements, such aspixel elements, associated with each pixel of the display are printed,etched or otherwise manufactured in the form of, for example,transistors or other switching elements, a secondary or frontplanedisplay substrate on which OLEDs, e-ink microcapsules or otherenergizable components that form black and white or various colors onthe display for each pixel, and, in some cases a further flexiblesubstrate layer that operates as a ground layer. In some embodiments,such as in electrophoretic displays, the frontplane and backplane arelaminated together as frontplane and backplane components. In someembodiments, the flexible display 48 may be built in layers, e.g.,starting with the backplane and ending with attaching the frontplanesubstrate.

As illustrated in FIG. 69, the display area 80 formed on the backplanecomponent of such a display 18 may be generally rectangular in shape andhave a large aspect ratio, e.g., an aspect ratio where the length of thedisplay area 80 is at least two times greater than the width of thedisplay area 80, and, in some configurations, is at least five timesgreater than the width. The display area 80 includes any number ofpixels or pixel elements, each of which may be connected to at least twolines (e.g., electrical lines, lead lines, electrodes, connecting linesor connectors) for energization thereof. The electrical lines orconnecting lines are disposed at the pixel elements and exit from thedisplay area 80 via various sides of the display area 80. Generally,each line services a particular row or column of pixel elements. Assuch, in FIG. 69, the connection lines are illustrated as a first set ofconnecting lines 82 coming from one of the longitudinal sides andincluding a line 82 for each of y columns of pixels of the display area80 (e.g., a set of longitudinal connecting lines), and a second set ofconnecting lines 84 coming from one of the transverse sides of thedisplay area 80 and including a line 84 for each of x rows of pixels ofthe display area 80 (e.g., a set of transverse connecting lines). As isknown, energization or connection between a particular connecting line82 of a column y_(n) and a connecting line 84 of a row x_(m) of thedisplay area will energize or turn on that corresponding pixel, and, assuch, the corresponding pixel may be referred to using itstwo-dimensional coordinates, e.g., (x_(m), y_(n)) or (y_(n), x_(m)). Inany event, as illustrated in FIG. 69, the sets of connecting lines 82,84 exit from the display area 80 along the same backplane substrate andare connected to one or more multiplexer or IC driving circuits 88,which may be formed, for example, on or near the edge of the backplanedisplay substrate. The driving circuits 88 may be integral with thedisplay driver 48 of the electronic suite 38, or the driving circuits 88may be disposed separately from but nonetheless communicativelyconnected to the display driver 48, e.g., the driving circuits 88 aredisposed on a flexible connector 90 connecting the backplane layer tothe electronics module 19. Typically, the flexible connector 90 is notintegral with the backplane layer, but instead is a separate elementthat couples to the backplane layer to communicate with the electronicsmodule 19 and components included therein, such as the display driver48.

FIG. 70 illustrates a manner of folding or bending the substrate 81 ofFIG. 69, to form a display that includes a maximum amount of displayarea 80 on the top thereof that is viewable to the user, so as tomaximize the amount of area on the band 12 at which the display area 80is viewable and to minimize the area of edges surrounding the displayarea 80 that are visible to the user. (For ease of viewing, the flexibleconnector 90 is not shown in FIGS. 70-71.) In FIG. 70 in particular, thebending may occur along the dotted line 89A, illustrated in FIG. 69, soas to fold over the backplane sections adjacent to the longitudinal sideof the display area 80 at which the connecting lines 82 are disposed.This folding enables the connecting lines 82 to be bent down and underthe display area 80, and enables the multiplexer or IC driving circuits88 to be connected to the display driver 48 (disposed in, for example,one of electronics module 19 not shown in FIGS. 69 and 70) via separateelectronics or electrical connections. Thus, as illustrated in FIG. 70,which depicts a cross-sectional end view of the flexible display 18, theflexible display 18 so formed and bent enables the separate longitudinaldisplay lines 82 to be connected to different multiplexer or driving ICcircuits 88, which are ultimately connected to the display driver 48 ofFIG. 65, in order to energize the rows and columns of pixel elements ofthe flexible display 18 to thereby drive the display 18. As the fold 89Aoccurs along the edge of the display area 80, the areas of the backplanesubstrate of the flexible display 18 that are used to form theconnecting lines 82 are disposed in a different plane than, and aredisposed in some cases under the display area 80, and thus do notrequire the backplane substrate 81 to extend out towards the sides ofthe band 12 much beyond the edges of the display area 80. Thisconfiguration, in turn, enables the maximal amount of viewable displayarea to be disposed on the top portion of the band 12 which maximizesthe viewable or usable area of the band 12 at which the display 18 canpresent viewable images. In some embodiments, the backplane substrate 81may also be bent along the dotted line 89B along the oppositelongitudinal side, even if the opposite longitudinal side does notsupport any electrodes or connectors thereon, e.g., for ease ofmanufacturing and/or for aesthetic considerations.

FIG. 71 illustrates a cross-sectional view of the display 18 bent asillustrated in FIG. 70 and disposed in or on a flexible support 16 ofthe band 12, with the display 18 having the maximal display area 80thereon disposed up to the edges of the band of the device 10. In thiscase, the flexible support 16 is illustrated as having sidewalls to forma protective barrier to protect the display 18 at the edges thereof fromside impacts. Of course, other manners of manufacturing the display 18could be used and implemented to produce the dynamically flexible,attachable article or device 10.

In some cases (for example, due to the size of the display area 80, thematerial composition of the flexible display 18, etc.), bending thebackplane layer 81 so that the electrodes or connectors 82 are under thedisplay area 80 may cause undesirable effects, such as interferencebetween various electrical components of the backplane layer 81.Further, in order for the flexible display 18 to be as dynamicallyflexible as possible, the impact of the more rigid portions of thebackplane layer 81 (e.g., the portions which support the less-flexibleor rigid driving circuits 88) on the flexibility of the display area 80is desired to be minimized. Still further, a minimum border extendingfrom the display area 80 and viewable to a user may be necessary to sealthe top and bottom layers of the flexible display 18, e.g., by using anenvironmental barrier material for the frontplane and backplanesubstrates and the seal, or by some other means. In electrophoreticdisplays, for instance, the required width of a border for sealing istypically around 2 to 6 mm.

As will be understood, the dynamically flexible, attachable article ordevice 10 as described above can be configured and operated in manydifferent manners to perform many different functions at the same or atdifferent times. For example, the device 10 may operate to execute anynumber of different types of applications including, for example,calendar applications, e-mail applications, web-browsing applications,picture, image or video display applications, stop-watch or other timingapplications, alarm clock or alarming applications, location basedapplications including for example mapping applications, navigationalapplications, etc. In some cases, various different applications orfunctionality may be performed simultaneously, and different sections orportions of the flexible display 18 may be used to display informationassociated with the different applications. For example, one portion ofthe flexible display 18 may be used to illustrate calendar informationprovided by a calendar application, another portion of the flexibledisplay 18 may be used to illustrate e-mails associated with an e-mailapplication and a still further portion of the flexible display 18 maybe used to display a clock or stop watch associated with a timingapplication. Still further, the applications 60 executed on the device10 may be executed on and display information computed solely with theelectronics suite 38 of the device 10. In another case, one or moreapplications 60 may be executed on the processor 42 of the device 10 tointerface with and display information received from external computingdevices, such as a mobile phone, a laptop computer, a desktop computer,etc. In this case, the device 10 may act as a slave display device ormay operate in conjunction with information received from the externalcomputing device to provide information, graphics, etc. to a user on theflexible display 18 of the device 10. The device 10 may communicate withexternal devices or an external network via any desired communicationhardware, software and communications protocol, including any LAN or WANbased protocol, an NFC protocol, a Bluetooth protocol, an IP protocol,an RFID protocol, etc.

FIGS. 72A-72E illustrate various different types of displays or imageswhich may be provided on the flexible display 18 of the device 10 atvarious different times or even at the same time. For example, in onescenario illustrated in FIG. 72A, the display 18 may depict a pattern,an artistic rendition or other image that is particularly expressive ofthe wearer or user, including for example, an image provided by theuser, a picture or a photo, an image of a hand-drawn sketch, a team,corporate or other organizational logo, a message of some sort, or someother image that expresses some interest or personality trait of theuser. Such an image might be displayed whenever the device 10 is in asleep mode, that is, when the device 10 is not being actively used inother modes. Moreover, such an image could be resident on the display 18for long periods of time whenever the display 18 is not in use, if theflexible display 18 is a bi-stable display, such as an e-ink display,which requires no power to hold the image in place once image is beenformed.

As illustrated in FIG. 72B, in another mode referred to herein as anoffice mode or a calendar mode, the device 10 displays a calendar screenand an e-mail screen or other images associated with or set up toprovide office or business related functionality. Such a mode mayprovide images that enable the user to easily view e-mails, calendarsand to use other business related applications. Thus, for example, thedisplay 55B may provide a calendar of events, and may also display oneor more e-mail icons, text messaging icons, etc., indicating e-mails ortext messages that may be available and viewable to the user.

FIG. 72C illustrates the device 10 in an alarm/clock mode in which theflexible display 18 provides an alarm or clock display that may begenerated by an alarm or clock application. An alarm may ring bysounding a speaker (e.g., one of the electronic devices 53 of FIG. 65)at a particular time according to a preset alarm notification and/or thedevice 10 might use a gyroscope or accelerometer to vibrate the device10 to cause a vibration indicating an alarm. Still further, asillustrated FIG. 72D, the device 10 may be placed in an exercise ortraining mode in which the flexible display 18 displays a stopwatch, adistance traveled or other indications of various athletic parametersthat have been met or associated with an exercise routine including, forexample, use of the step counter to determine the number of steps thathave been taken, to determine the number of lifts that have beenperformed when, for example, lifting weights, etc. Likewise, in such amode, the display 18 may display a distance traveled by a runner orwalker, the time since the beginning of a run or other exercise, etc.Still further, as illustrated in FIG. 72D, a portion of the display 18may be used to indicate the current song that is playing via a musicapplication implemented on the article 10.

In a still further mode, illustrated in FIG. 72E, the wristband devicemight be a slave display to another computer device, such as anavigation device within a car, a phone, a laptop computer, an e-reader.In this case, the display 18 may display, for example, a map, a route,directions, etc. on a map as provided by a navigation device to thedevice 10 via, for example, a Bluetooth communication module or othercommunication module that provides communication between the device 10and the navigation device (not shown). Such a slave display might enablethe device 10 to be more visible to the user in a driving situation. Ofcourse, other types of visuals and displays can be provided with othertypes of applications stored on the device 10 or in othercommunicatively coupled computer devices, such as phones or computersthat communicate with the device 10 to provide images or information fordisplay to the user.

As part of one of these or other uses, the device 10 may be separatelyconnectable to magnetic strips or other exteriorly located magnetic ormetallic devices to which the magnets 20 and 22 within the end pieces 14are magnetically attracted. In this case, the strips may havecommunication modules therein or associated therewith that communicatewith and enable the device 10 to determine the location of the device 10and to thus control the default functionality of the device 10. That is,the device 10 may be placed around someone's wrist and used in variousdifferent modes to provide information to the user as it is wrappedaround the wrist. However, the device 10 might also be taken off thewrist and applied to other surfaces, such as on tables, desks, cardashboards, refrigerators, nightstands, or any other surface. In thiscase, the device 10 may automatically operate to detect its currentlocation and provide various default or automatic functionality based onthe determined location. As an example, FIG. 73A illustrates a device 10having magnets disposed in the clasps or ends 14, which are magneticallycoupled to magnetic strips 100 which are separately disposed on adifferent surface or surfaces to cause the device 10 to have theflexible display 18 laid out horizontally or straight along the surface.In a similar manner, FIG. 73B illustrates the device 10 disposed in acurved manner between two magnetic strips 100 to create a curved displayfor viewing by a user.

Here, in addition to include a metal, magnet or other magnetic material,one or more of the magnetic strips 100 may include a location detectionmechanism 101 therein, such as an RFID tag, a Bluetooth or near fieldcommunication module, or any other kind of passive or activecommunication technology that communicates with the communication module46 within the device 10, to indicate the location or a unique identifierof the strip 100 and thus the current location of the device 10 when thedevice 10 is disposed near or adjacent the strips 100. In this case,each or at least one of the strips 100 may include a unique RFID tag,NFC identifier, Bluetooth communication identifier or other identifierthat identifies itself and/or its precise location. An applicationexecuted within the device 10, such as one of the applications 60 ofFIG. 65, may operate to obtain, via the communication module 46 (whichmay be an RFID communication module, a Bluetooth communication module,an NFC module, etc.), the tag number or the identity of the strip 100and may locate that tag number within its memory as being associatedwith a particular functionality. The application 60 may then configurethe device 10 to operate in a default manner based on the detected stripidentity or location, such as by running one or more other applications60. Of course, the strips 100 need not be magnetic in nature but couldinstead be any type of device having an RFID tag, a Bluetooth module(such as Bluetooth tiles) or other communication module therein that isdetectable by the device 10 whenever the device 10 is in a certain rangeof or near the strip 100. That is, the device 10 need not bemagnetically connected to the strip 100 to perform the locationdetection described herein.

Once the RFID tag or other identifier of the strip 100 is determined viacommunication with the module 101, the device 10 and, in particular, themicroprocessor 42 thereof, may execute a particular applicationindicating or providing certain functionality associated with thelocation or positioning of the device 10 at that strip 100. Thus, thestrips 100 may be placed on a refrigerator, and when so used, maydisclose particular information necessary or generally associated withkitchen usage, such as a shopping list, a calorie count of particularfoods that the user might be eating, a clock or other type of alarmmechanism for timing the cooking or refrigeration of certain food items,etc. On the other hand, the device 10 may be removed from a strip 100 onthe refrigerator, and placed next to a different strip, such as thatlocated in bedroom, and there default to operate as alarm clock. In astill further usage, the device 10 may be removed and taken to an officeand, when set on or near strips associated with or pre-identified withthe office, automatically display e-mail accounts or calendarinformation that is typically more useful and associated with an officeenvironment. Still further, the device 10 might be then taken off andput on a car dashboard having strips thereon which identifies thewristband device as being located on the car dashboard. In this case,the device 10 might provide information more useful within a car, suchas executing an application that interfaces with a navigation device andacts as a slave display to the navigation device, to thereby displayinformation provided by the navigation device to a user in a more easilyaccessible manner up on the dashboard. The device 10 may also or insteadoperate as a compass and show cardinal directions, as a clock, etc.

FIG. 74 illustrates, for example, various different environments inwhich the device 10 may be placed and associated with different strips100 as described above, including a home environment 102, an officeenvironment 104, and an automobile 106 to provide different automatic ordefault functionality of the device 10. Additionally, as illustrated inFIG. 74, the attachable device 10 can be attached to any other devicessuch as a coffee cup or mug 108 or other drinking vessel, a bicyclehandlebar 110, a phone case 112, a computer 114, a belt 116, a shoe 118,a docking or charging stand 120, or any other device on which or nearwhich a strip 100 having a communication module is located. Of course,the default functionality may be provided by placement of the device 10close to the strips and the identification of those strips. However, theuser could still change the functionality of the device 10 to otherfunctionality associated with other applications or displays that mightbe necessary or desirable at the time, instead of the defaultfunctionality associated with the detected location. Moreover, differentdefault functionality might be associated with different locationswithin each environment. Thus, for example, FIG. 74 illustrates twodifferent locations within the home environment 102 and three differentlocations within the office environment 104, with each location having adifferent detectable strip 100 and thus a potential different defaultfunctionality.

Of course, it will be understood, that the use of the strips 100 and theidentifiers associated with the strips 100, which might communicate via,for example, RFID, NFC, Bluetooth or any other desired communicationhardware and protocols, enables the device 10 to have automatic defaultfunctionality based on its location. The sensors 52 and other electronicdevices 53 within the device 10 may also be used to provide defaultfunctionality. For example, the gyroscopes or accelerometers may be usedto detect the orientation of the device 10, e.g., whether the device 10is located more horizontally or vertically, and this orientation may beused to control the manner or direction in which information isdisplayed on the flexible display 18. The sensors 52 and devices 53 mayalso detect whether the device 10 is undergoing movement oracceleration, which might cause the device 10 to have differentfunctionality or to change a display in some manner.

As another example, FIGS. 75 and 76 illustrate a base station (such asthe charging station 120 of FIG. 74) that can be used to hold and chargea device 10, such as the device 10 illustrated in FIG. 17. As depictedin FIG. 75, the base station 120 may include a flat panel 122 having arecess, an indent or a space 124 formed therein. In this case, thedevice 10 of FIG. 17, when laid out flat as illustrated in FIG. 17, maybe placed against the flat plate 122 so that the electronics module 19fits within the indent, recess or space 124. Magnets within the band 12of the device 10 may be magnetically attracted to metal or othermagnetically permeable material (including magnets) within the stand 120(not shown) and help to hold the device 10 in place on the stand 120.When so located, the charging contact 349 of the band 10 as illustratedin FIG. 17, comes into contact with or is disposed near a chargingcontact 126 of the stand 120, which when plugged into a source of powervia a cord 128 operates to charge the battery of the device 10. As notedearlier, the charging contacts 126 and 349 may operate to provide directcharging or inductive charging to the battery within the electronicsmodule 19. Of course, the stand 120 may include a charging unit (notshown) to provide the proper or appropriate charging signals to thecharging contact 126 and this charging unit may be a direct chargingunit or an inductively coupled charging unit.

Moreover, as illustrated in FIG. 76, the device 10, when disposed on thestand 120 may detect an RFID tag or other communication signal emanatingfrom the stand 120 and operate in a preconfigured manner based on thedetection of that signal. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 76, theband 10 may provide a display with various screens or sectionsincluding, for example, a traffic section, a weather section, a messagessection, an alarm or clock section, etc. Each of these sections mayprovide information about or related to the traffic (received via a WiFior other communication connection), weather (received via a WiFi orother communication connection), messages (received via an e-mail ortext messaging services or applications), time or alarm information,etc. Of course the operation of the band device 10 when placed on thestand 120 can be configured in any desired manner by a user, forexample.

More generally, the user may be able to program or configure the device10 to operate in any desired manner, including any desired defaultmanner, based on the detected location, position, orientation, ormovement of the device 10. In this case, a configuration application maybe executed in a processor of a computer device to develop or configurethe operation of the device 10, including the various operational modesof the device 10, the various default settings based on the mode of thedevice 10, the motions or actions or locations that may triggerparticular modes of the device 10, inputs or gestures associated witheach mode or application of the device 10 and what those inputs orgestures may mean in the context of the device 10, etc. As an example,FIG. 77 illustrates a computer 150 having a processor 152, a memory 154and a display 156. The memory 154 stores a configuration application 158that may execute on the processor 152 to enable a user to configure theoperation of the device 10. In particular, the configuration application158, when executed, may produce a configuration screen such as theconfiguration screen 160 illustrated in FIG. 75. The configurationscreen 160 may display an image of the wristband device 162 toillustrate what will be displayed on the display 18 of the device 10 atvarious times, and the manner in which this information will bedisplayed, such as the orientation, position on the display 18, etc.

In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 77, the configuration screen 160 maypresent a number of boxes or drop down menus, etc. which can be used todefine various modes or other operational settings of the device 10 andthe default operation of the device 10 during each such mode. Forexample, a user may select one of a set of mode boxes 170 to define theconfiguration of a particular mode of the device 10. The user may selecta sleep mode box, an office mode box, an exercise mode box, a home modebox, a car mode, or may select an “other” box to define a new mode forwhich the device 10 is to be configured. Upon selecting the appropriatemode box 170, the user may be presented with information or optionsabout the default and other operations of the device 10 during theselected mode. For example, the user may be able to define the actions172, locations 174, e.g., as defined by the exterior strips 100 (e.g.,of FIGS. 73-74) that might be used to enter a particular mode.Thereafter, another set of menus or drop down boxes or windows may beused to enable a user to define the placement, content, orientation,etc. or other display features 176 of information to be displayed on theflexible display 18. Still further, the user may select one or moreapplications 178 to execute during a particular mode, the placement,size and area of the screen associated with the application display, theorientation of the display on the screen, the background features,borders features or other screen indicia, etc. Likewise, the user maydefine one or more RFID tag ids or other ids to define exteriorlocations that are to be associated with or that cause the device 10 toenter or operate in a particular mode. In this manner, the configurationapplication 158 enables the device 10 to have default functionalitybased on the functions to be provided, based on the location of thedevice 10, based on its orientation or position around the wrist or notbeing connected around the wrist, based on movement of the device 10,etc.

In another case, the configuration screen 160 may enable the user todefine one or more gestures 180 associated with a particular mode or aparticular application on the device 10. Thus, for example, the usermight define a gesture that, when detected on the touch screen interface26 of the device 10, such as a swipe gesture, a pinch gesture, a doubletap gesture, etc. causes the device 10 to operate in a certain manner,such as to switch between modes, to change orientation of the image onthe display 18, to cause portions of the displayed information to moveor to appear or disappear, or to cause a particular action within anapplication, such as to pull up new information, etc. Additionally oralternatively, the user might define one or more gestures that aredetectable by one or more of the sensors 52, such as a rapid shaking, orsuch as a magnitude, duration, and/or a number of squeezing forcesapplied to the outer faces of the device 10 when the device 10 is in alooped configuration. Thus, using the configuration application screen160, the user may define various different gestures or may preprogramvarious gestures to define desired device functionality, such asswitching between modes, turning on and off the device or applications,switching applications, moving images or content of particularapplications on the display 18, taking actions within an application,etc. As a further example, one gesture may be defined by the user tounlock the device 10 or allow operation of the device 10 such asimplementing a locking or security feature. In this case, is notnecessary that the device 10 display numbers or have the user pick a setof numbers but instead, gestures might enable the user to define anaction that will unlock device, such as a swipe in one direction, twotaps and a swipe in a particular direction, etc. Of course, the samegesture could be used for different types of operations in differentmodes of the device 10 or with different applications implemented by thedevice 10, and any combination of gestures might be used with anycombination of applications or modes to enable different functionalityor to enable the functionality of the device 10 be programmed in variousmanners. Once configured as such, the configuration data as selected bythe user via the configuration application 158 on the computer 150 canbe downloaded to the device 10, either wirelessly or via a wiredconnection, and stored in the memory 44 thereof and then be used by theoperating system of the device 10 to operate.

The following additional considerations apply to the foregoingdiscussion. As used herein, a groove is any structure that includes alower surface disposed between two higher surfaces (which may be flatsurfaces or ridges, for example), and that is connected to the higherservices via straight, sloped or even curved sides. Throughout thisspecification, plural instances may implement components, operations, orstructures described as a single instance. Although individualoperations of one or more routines or methods are illustrated anddescribed as separate operations, one or more of the individualoperations may be performed concurrently, and nothing requires that theoperations be performed in the order illustrated. Structures andfunctionality presented as separate components in example configurationsmay be implemented as a combined structure or component. Similarly,structures and functionality presented as a single component may beimplemented as separate components. These and other variations,modifications, additions, and improvements fall within the scope of thesubject matter of the present disclosure.

Additionally, certain embodiments are described herein as includinglogic or a number of components, modules, or mechanisms or units.Modules and units may constitute either software modules (e.g., codestored on a non-transitory machine-readable medium) or hardware modules.A hardware module is tangible unit capable of performing certainoperations and may be configured or arranged in a certain manner. Inexample embodiments, one or more computer systems (e.g., a standalone,client or server computer system) or one or more hardware modules of acomputer system (e.g., a processor or a group of processors) may beconfigured by software (e.g., an application or application portion) asa hardware module that operates to perform certain operations asdescribed herein.

A hardware module may comprise dedicated circuitry or logic that ispermanently configured (e.g., as a special-purpose processor, such as afield programmable gate array (FPGA) or an application-specificintegrated circuit (ASIC)) to perform certain operations. A hardwaremodule may also include programmable logic or circuitry (e.g., asencompassed within a general-purpose processor or other programmableprocessor) that is temporarily configured by software to perform certainoperations. It will be appreciated that the decision to implement ahardware module in dedicated and permanently configured circuitry or intemporarily configured circuitry (e.g., configured by software) may bedriven by cost and time considerations.

Accordingly, the hardware terms used herein should be understood toencompass tangible entities, be that entities that are physicallyconstructed, permanently configured (e.g., hardwired), or temporarilyconfigured (e.g., programmed) to operate in a certain manner or toperform certain operations described herein. Considering embodiments inwhich hardware modules are temporarily configured (e.g., programmed),each of the hardware modules need not be configured or instantiated atany one instance in time. For example, where the hardware modulescomprise a general-purpose processor configured using software, thegeneral-purpose processor may be configured as respective differenthardware modules at different times. Software may accordingly configurea processor, for example, to constitute a particular hardware module atone instance of time and to constitute a different hardware module at adifferent instance of time.

Hardware and software modules can provide information to, and receiveinformation from, other hardware and/or software modules. Accordingly,the described hardware modules may be regarded as being communicativelycoupled. Where multiple of such hardware or software modules existcontemporaneously, communications may be achieved through signaltransmission (e.g., over appropriate circuits, lines and buses) thatconnect the hardware or software modules. In embodiments in whichmultiple hardware modules or software are configured or instantiated atdifferent times, communications between such hardware or softwaremodules may be achieved, for example, through the storage and retrievalof information in memory structures to which the multiple hardware orsoftware modules have access. For example, one hardware or softwaremodule may perform an operation and store the output of that operationin a memory device to which it is communicatively coupled. A furtherhardware or software module may then, at a later time, access the memorydevice to retrieve and process the stored output. Hardware and softwaremodules may also initiate communications with input or output devices,and can operate on a resource (e.g., a collection of information).

The various operations of example methods described herein may beperformed, at least partially, by one or more processors that aretemporarily configured (e.g., by software) or permanently configured toperform the relevant operations. Whether temporarily or permanentlyconfigured, such processors may constitute processor-implemented modulesthat operate to perform one or more operations or functions. The modulesreferred to herein may, in some example embodiments, includeprocessor-implemented modules.

Similarly, the methods or routines described herein may be at leastpartially processor-implemented. For example, at least some of theoperations of a method may be performed by one or processors orprocessor-implemented hardware modules. The performance of certain ofthe operations may be distributed among the one or more processors, notonly residing within a single machine, but deployed across a number ofmachines. In some example embodiments, the processor or processors maybe located in a single location (e.g., within a home environment, anoffice environment or as a server farm), while in other embodiments theprocessors may be distributed across a number of locations.

Some portions of this specification are presented in terms of algorithmsor symbolic representations of operations on data stored as bits orbinary digital signals within a machine memory (e.g., a computermemory). These algorithms or symbolic representations are examples oftechniques used by those of ordinary skill in the data processing artsto convey the substance of their work to others skilled in the art. Asused herein, an “application,” an “algorithm” or a “routine” is aself-consistent sequence of operations or similar processing leading toa desired result. In this context, applications, algorithms, routinesand operations involve physical manipulation of physical quantities.Typically, but not necessarily, such quantities may take the form ofelectrical, magnetic, or optical signals capable of being stored,accessed, transferred, combined, compared, or otherwise manipulated by amachine. It is convenient at times, principally for reasons of commonusage, to refer to such signals using words such as “data,” “content,”“bits,” “values,” “elements,” “symbols,” “characters,” “terms,”“numbers,” “numerals,” or the like. These words, however, are merelyconvenient labels and are to be associated with appropriate physicalquantities.

Unless specifically stated otherwise, discussions herein using wordssuch as “processing,” “computing,” “calculating,” “determining,”“presenting,” “displaying,” or the like may refer to actions orprocesses of a machine (e.g., a computer) that manipulates or transformsdata represented as physical (e.g., electronic, magnetic, or optical)quantities within one or more memories (e.g., volatile memory,non-volatile memory, or a combination thereof), registers, or othermachine components that receive, store, transmit, or displayinformation.

As used herein any reference to “one embodiment” or “an embodiment”means that a particular element, feature, structure, or characteristicdescribed in connection with the embodiment is included in at least oneembodiment. The appearances of the phrase “in one embodiment” in variousplaces in the specification are not necessarily all referring to thesame embodiment.

Some embodiments may be described using the expression “coupled” and“connected” along with their derivatives. For example, some embodimentsmay be described using the term “coupled” to indicate that two or moreelements are in direct physical or electrical contact. The term“coupled,” however, may also mean that two or more elements are not indirect contact with each other, but yet still co-operate or interactwith each other. The embodiments are not limited in this context.

As used herein, the terms “comprises,” “comprising,” “includes,”“including,” “has,” “having” or any other variation thereof, areintended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion. For example, a process,method, article, or apparatus that comprises a list of elements is notnecessarily limited to only those elements but may include otherelements not expressly listed or inherent to such process, method,article, or apparatus. Further, unless expressly stated to the contrary,“or” refers to an inclusive or and not to an exclusive or. For example,a condition A or B is satisfied by any one of the following: A is true(or present) and B is false (or not present), A is false (or notpresent) and B is true (or present), and both A and B are true (orpresent).

In addition, use of “a” or “an” is employed to describe elements andcomponents of the embodiments herein. This is done merely forconvenience and to give a general sense of the description. Thisdescription should be read to include one or at least one and thesingular also includes the plural unless it is obvious that it is meantotherwise.

Upon reading this disclosure, those of skill in the art will appreciatestill additional alternative structural and functional designs forimplementing display features via a flexible electronic display on adynamically flexible, attachable article as disclosed herein. Thus,while particular embodiments and applications have been illustrated anddescribed herein, it is to be understood that the disclosed embodimentsare not limited to the precise construction and components disclosedherein. Various modifications, changes and variations, which will beapparent to those skilled in the art, may be made in the arrangement,operation and details of the methods and structure disclosed hereinwithout departing from the spirit and scope defined in the claims.

1. An article, comprising: a first flexible electronic component; asecond flexible electronic component; and a flexible support structuremovably coupled to at least one of the first flexible electroniccomponent and the second flexible electronic component, the flexiblesupport structure and the at least one of the first flexible electroniccomponent and the second flexible electronic component movable relativeto one another when the attachable article is moved between asubstantially flat position and a curved position.
 2. The article ofclaim 1, wherein the flexible support structure is slidably coupled toboth the first flexible electronic component and the second flexibleelectronic component.
 3. The article of claim 1, wherein the flexiblesupport structure is slidably coupled to the first flexible electroniccomponent, and wherein the flexible support structure is fixedly coupledto the second flexible electronic component.
 4. The article of claim 1,wherein the flexible support structure defines a first cavity and asecond cavity, the first flexible electronic component being disposedwithin the first cavity, and the second flexible electronic componentbeing disposed within the second cavity.
 5. The article of claim 4,wherein the flexible support structure is defined by two walls and, foreach of the two walls, a pair of opposing sidewalls extending upwardfrom the respective one of the two walls, each of the first cavity andthe second cavity being defined between one of the two walls and therespective pair of opposing sidewalls.
 6. The article of claim 4,further comprising one or more flexible sheets coupled to the flexiblesupport structure and at least partially covering at least one of thefirst cavity and the second cavity, at least one of the first flexibleelectronic component and the second flexible electronic component beingat least partially visible through the one or more flexible sheets. 7.The article of claim 1, further comprising a mechanical supportcomponent coupled to the flexible support structure, the mechanicalsupport component having a higher Young's Modulus than the flexiblesupport structure.
 8. The article of claim 7, wherein the flexiblesupport structure defines a first cavity, a second cavity, and a slot,the first flexible electronic component being disposed in the firstcavity, one of the second flexible electronic component and themechanical support component being disposed in the second cavity, andthe other of the second flexible electronic component and the mechanicalsupport component being disposed in the slot.
 9. The article of claim 7,wherein the flexible support structure defines a cavity, wherein thefirst flexible electronic component is adhered to the mechanical supportcomponent to form a first assembly, wherein the first assembly isadhered to the flexible support structure, and wherein the secondflexible electronic component is disposed in the cavity.
 10. An article,comprising: a flexible electronic component; and a support structurecoupled to the flexible electronic component, the support structurecomprising a first substrate and a second substrate movably connected tothe first substrate, a plurality of slots being formed in the firstsubstrate and a plurality of projections being formed on the secondsubstrate and movably disposed within a corresponding one of theplurality of slots, the plurality of slots configured to limit bendingof the article and configured to limit torsion applied to the article toa range within a torsion tolerance of the flexible electronic component.11. The article of claim 10, wherein the plurality of slots comprises afirst subset of slots and a second subset of slots formed across fromthe first subset, each of the first subset of slots having a differentlength, and each of the second subset of slots having a differentlength, and wherein the plurality of projections comprises a firstsubset of projections and a second subset of projections formed acrossfrom the first subset, each of the first subset of projections having adifferent length, and each of the second subset of projections having adifferent length, the lengths defined such that the article has adesired shape.
 12. The article of claim 10, wherein the plurality ofslots are formed proximate to or in a perimeter edge of the firstsubstrate, and wherein the plurality of projections are formed proximateto or in a perimeter edge of the second substrate.
 13. The article ofclaim 10, wherein a portion of the first substrate is locally fixedlyattached to a portion of the second substrate at a fixation point. 14.The article of claim 10, wherein each slot defines a first stop surfaceand a second stop surface opposite the first stop surface, each firststop surface arranged to limit bending of the flexible electroniccomponent when the article is in a first stable position, and eachsecond stop surface arranged to limit bending of the flexible electroniccomponent when the article is in a second stable position.